ENGLiSh SUMMER CAMP

Transcription

ENGLiSh SUMMER CAMP
English Summer Camp
WELCOME TO THE BEST SUMMER OF YOUR
LIFE AT TECS SUMMER CAMP!
Welcome to TECS Summer Camps! We are delighted that you have chosen to join us for the
summer and are sure that a fun-filled, action packed but, and we never shirk from saying this,
hard work awaits you! We are proud to have assembled a truly international team to work at our
camps and we are sure that each and everyone of you has the ability to contribute in a positive
way to the dynamics of camp life and the learning experience of the many campers who will pass
through our gates this summer.
This manual represents your “Camp Bible”. Undoubtedly it contains a lot of information but its
essential reading both in terms of informing yourself about camp procedures and importantly
getting yourself in the right mind set for the many challenges that await you, not only working with
foreign language children but also living and working within a residential camp environment.
When arriving at camp you are bound to have lots of questions. Please look at Appendix 1 of
this manual which will help answer some of the questions you might have on arrival. Also before
the first session on Tuesday morning please read Chapter 2 “Training Week” which will give you
further guidance on what awaits you this week and the parts of the manual you should be
reading to best prepare yourself for each session.
Name: ______________________________________ Camp: _____________________
TECS - Camp Manual
1
English Summer Camp
Camp Emergency Numbers:
Douglas (Director of Lang)
661-75-20-06
Gill (Ast Dir of Lang)
661-75-20-04
Liz + Guille (Family Dirs.)
637-70-44-20
Christina (Star Director)
661-89-81-71
Inge (Magic Dir.)
607-70-58-87
Niall (LV Dir.)
607-70-58-87
Bosco + Andrea (Sports Dirs.)607-70-58-12
Maria (GO Dir.)
607-70-58-14
Emergency Numbers:
Fire Station
085
National Police:
091
Hospital:
956 540 011
Ambulance:
061 (956 012 000)
Other Numbers (El Puerto):
Taxi
956 858 584
Tourist Office
956 542 413
Camp Address and Numbers:
Family Camp and Central Office **this is the training week site for ALL Camps**
TECS English Centre
Ctra. Fuentebravía Km 1
11500 El Puerto de Santa María, Cádiz
Tel. 956 850 560 Fax. 956 873 804
Medical Centre: Lansys: 956 871 111
Sports Camp
TECS Camp
Colegio Salesianos de Campano
Carretera Cadiz-Malaga
Pago Campano
11130 Chiclana de la Frontera, Cádiz
Star Camp
TECS Camp
NH Hotel Sotogrande
Autovía A-7, Salida 130
11310 Sotogrande, Cádiz
Little Village
TECS Camp
Ctra. El Bosque-Grazalema, km. 47.
11610 Grazalema, Cádiz
Magic Village
TECS Camp
Los Chozos
Sendero Ojo del Moro
11612 Benaocaz, Cádiz
Go Camp
TECS Camp
Hacienda Barriche
Pago de las Golondrinas
11180 Alcalá de los Gazules, Cádiz
TECS - Camp Manual
2
English Summer Camp
Arrivals Checklist
Please sign and return this sheet to your Coordinator.
Name and age group: __________________________________________
MANUALS PER POSITION
MONITOR/AM
TEACHER
NURSE
CREW
MEMBER
1. General
Manual
2. Crew
Member
Manual
3. Updated
training
timetable
DRIVER
1. General
Manual
2. Updated
training
timetable
1. General Manual
1. General
1. General
2. Teacher Manual
Manual
Manual
3. Evening
2. Nurse’s
2. Drivers
Entertainment
manual
Manual
Manual (FC)
3. Updated
3. Updated
5. Communication
training
training
Manual
timetable
timetable
4. Updated training
timetable
*Staff will have access to the Evening Entertainment, Arts & Crafts, and Sports Manual in the
ITEM
Camp Manual
El Puerto Map
2 red polos (1 old, 1 new)
4 t-shirts (monitor)
3 t-shirts (teacher)
1 cap
1 whistle
1 camp key
1 staff locker key
Resource pack (Teachers only)
CHECK IN
IT SPECIALIST
CAMP SUPPORT
1. General Manual
2. IT Manual
3. Updated
training timetable
1. General
Manual
2. Camp Support
Manual
3. Updated
training
timetable
staff room for any preparation needs.
CHECK OUT
X
X
Staff can keep 1
t-shirt.
X
X
Arrival Date/Time:
Departure Date/Time:
Signature:
Date:
* Red polos to be worn on arrivals, departures and excursions. Colour t-shirt to
be worn at all other times *
*Staff need not wear uniform until the 4th of July*
*All items not marked with an X must be returned at the end of your contract
TECS - Camp Manual 3
English Summer Camp
Table of Contents
ARRIVALS CHECKLIST ........................................................................................................................ 3 MISSION STATEMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 7 TECS General Manager ...................................................................................................................... 7 Director of Language Camps .............................................................................................................. 8 Family Camp Director......................................................................................................................... 9 Sports Camp Director .......................................................................................................................... 9 Little Village Director........................................................................................................................ 10 Magic Village Director ...................................................................................................................... 11 Star Camp Director ........................................................................................................................... 12 Go Camp Director ............................................................................................................................. 13 CHAPTER 1: MY ARRIVAL ON CAMP ............................................................................................. 14 SOME BASIC QUESTIONS YOU MIGHT HAVE ON ARRIVAL AT CAMP ...................................................... 14 CHAPTER 2: TRAINING WEEK ......................................................................................................... 17 TRAINING WEEK SCHEDULE ................................................................................................................... 18 TRAINING WEEK (MV, LV, SC + GO – FRIDAY TO SUNDAY, STC: SUNDAY) ........................................ 19 PRE TRAINING SESSION READING ........................................................................................................... 21 CHAPTER 3: INTRODUCTION TO TECS AND CAMP ................................................................... 23 WHAT IS TECS? WHO EXACTLY AM I WORKING FOR? ......................................................................... 23 THE CAMPS: FAMILY CAMP, STAR CAMP, GO CAMP, SPORTS CAMP, MAGIC VILLAGE, AND LITTLE
VILLAGE ................................................................................................................................................. 23 HOW DO THE FACILITIES DIFFER FOR TEACHERS ON EACH CAMP? ........................................................... 26 WHO ARE THE CAMPERS? WHAT ARE THEY LIKE? ................................................................................. 27 CHAPTER 4: CAMP STRUCTURE ...................................................................................................... 29 YEAR ROUND CAMP CENTRAL OFFICE STAFF ........................................................................................ 29 CAMP MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL .......................................................................................................... 29 CAMP STAFF ........................................................................................................................................... 31 WHO’S WHO OF CAMP 2010? ................................................................................................................. 32 FAMILY CAMP (EL PUERTO) ................................................................................................................... 33 LITTLE VILLAGE (GRAZALEMA) ............................................................................................................. 34 SPORT CAMP (CAMPANO SANCTI PETRI) ................................................................................................ 35 STAR CAMP (SOTOGRANDE) ................................................................................................................... 36 MAGIC VILLAGE (BENAOCAZ) ................................................................................................................ 37 MAGIC VILLAGE (BENAOCAZ) ................................................................................................................ 37 GO CAMP (EL BARRICHE) ....................................................................................................................... 38 CHAPTER 5: DAILY PROGRAMMES ................................................................................................ 46 AN INTRODUCTION TO THE DAILY PROGRAMME .................................................................................... 54 GETTING UP ROUTINE ............................................................................................................................ 54 ROOM / TENT INSPECTION ...................................................................................................................... 54 BREAKFAST ............................................................................................................................................ 55 Meal Time Table Control................................................................................................................... 55 Food on Camp ................................................................................................................................... 56 ENGLISH CLASS ...................................................................................................................................... 57 LUNCH .................................................................................................................................................... 57 CHILL OUT .............................................................................................................................................. 57 ARTS AND CRAFTS / PROJECTS (SENIORS) .............................................................................................. 57 SPORTS ................................................................................................................................................... 59 Getting the Best out of the Kids ......................................................................................................... 59 Sports Sessions Structure................................................................................................................... 60 Sport Session Guidelines ................................................................................................................... 60 TECS - Camp Manual 4
English Summer Camp
Safety during Sports Sessions ............................................................................................................ 60 Extra Activities .................................................................................................................................. 61 SHOWERS ................................................................................................................................................ 62 DINNER ................................................................................................................................................... 63 LEADER BONDING / CHILL OUT .............................................................................................................. 63 EVENING ENTERTAINMENTS ................................................................................................................... 63 EVENING ENTERTAINMENT TIDY UP ...................................................................................................... 68 TEACHERS PLANNING TIME .................................................................................................................... 68 PUTTING TO BED ROUTINE ..................................................................................................................... 68 NIGHT WATCH ........................................................................................................................................ 70 DAWN PATROL ....................................................................................................................................... 71 GUIDED INDEPENDENCE ......................................................................................................................... 72 ENGLISH DAY ......................................................................................................................................... 72 CHAPTER 6: DAILY RESPONSIBILITIES OF MONITORS AND TEACHERS .......................... 74 INFORMATION ON STAFF TIME OFF......................................................................................................... 79 MONDAY-FRIDAY DAILY TIME OFF ....................................................................................................... 79 MONITORS NIGHTS / MORNINGS OFF...................................................................................................... 82 DAYS OFF ............................................................................................................................................... 82 CHAPTER 7: COMMUNICATING WITH FOREIGN LANGUAGE CHILDREN ........................ 84 TIPS TO MAKE COMMUNICATION EASIER AND ENCOURAGE MORE ENGLISH ......................................... 84 THE USE OF SPANISH ON CAMP .............................................................................................................. 86 THE TOTAL ENGLISH EXPERIENCE.......................................................................................................... 88 CHAPTER 8: CAMP RULES ................................................................................................................. 89 STAFF CODE OF CONDUCT ...................................................................................................................... 89 CAMPERS’ RULES ................................................................................................................................... 92 DISCIPLINE PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................... 93 CHAPTER 9: CAMP PROCEDURES ................................................................................................... 96 MOBILE PHONES AND CAMPER PHONE CALL TIMES ............................................................................... 96 CAMPERS MONEY ................................................................................................................................... 97 FIRE PROCEDURE .................................................................................................................................... 97 LAUNDRY ............................................................................................................................................... 99 NON MULTI ACTIVITY RESPONSIBLES – SPECIALIST MONITOR ............................................................ 100 TECS YOUNG ACHIEVERS AWARD ...................................................................................................... 102 TECS HAPPY PASSPORT ....................................................................................................................... 105 JUNIOR I- BOOK .................................................................................................................................... 108 ENGLISH STAR AWARD (MAGIC VILLAGE) ........................................................................................... 110 CHAPTER 10: UNDERSTANDING THE DIFFERENT GROUPS ON CAMP ............................. 119 DIVISIONS MADE ON CAMP .................................................................................................................. 119 Age Groups ...................................................................................................................................... 119 Colours and Houses......................................................................................................................... 120 Residence / Tents (Family Camp Only) ........................................................................................... 121 DIVISIONS MADE ON AN AGE GROUP LEVEL ......................................................................................... 121 Leader Groups ................................................................................................................................. 121 English Class Groups ...................................................................................................................... 122 Arts and Crafts Group or Project Groups ....................................................................................... 123 Creative Project Group Magic Village ............................................................................................ 123 Sports Groups in Family Camp ....................................................................................................... 124 CHAPTER 11: COLOUR WAR ........................................................................................................... 126 COLOUR WAR POSITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 127 HOUSE COMPETITION: MAGIC VILLAGE AND GO CAMP ....................................................................... 129 COLOUR WAR POINTS........................................................................................................................... 130 TECS - Camp Manual 5
English Summer Camp
CHAPTER 12: TEAM SPIRIT, MORALE AND WORKING TOGETHER .................................. 131 EXPRESSING CONCERNS ....................................................................................................................... 132 CHAPTER 13: ARRIVALS DAY ........................................................................................................ 133 ARRIVALS DAY: SPORTS CAMP ............................................................................................................ 135 STAFF RESPONSIBILITIES: SET UP AND TIDY UP ................................................................................... 135 CHAPTER 14: EXCURSIONS ............................................................................................................ 136 EXCURSIONS DATES FOR 2010 .............................................................................................................. 137 ORGANISATION AND RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................................ 138 BUS RESPONSIBLE ................................................................................................................................ 139 IMPORTANT EXCURSION NOTES............................................................................................................ 139 SUPERVISION OF SOPHOMORES / YOUNGEST JUNIORS .......................................................................... 140 MID-WEEK EXCURSIONS ....................................................................................................................... 141 CHAPTER 15: DEPARTURES ........................................................................................................... 142 FRIDAY PRE-DEPARTURE DUTIES ......................................................................................................... 142 STAR CAMP DEPARTURES ..................................................................................................................... 144 LITTLE VILLAGE DEPARTURES ............................................................................................................. 144 CHAPTER 16: WELFARE, HEALTH AND MEDICAL PROCEDURE ....................................... 145 HEALTH AND MEDICAL PROCEDURES ................................................................................................... 146 BASIC PROCEDURE ............................................................................................................................... 146 WHO CAN I GO TO FOR HELP?................................................................................................................ 147 BASIC PRINCIPLES OF FIRST AID ........................................................................................................... 147 ILLNESSES AND EMERGENCIES.............................................................................................................. 148 HEALTH AND HYGIENE ......................................................................................................................... 151 APPENDICES ........................................................................................................................................ 154 APPENDIX 1 - THE EXCITING WORLD OF CAMP – A CAMPERS PERSPECTIVE ........................................ 154 APPENDIX 2 – CHANGE OVER TIMES BETWEEN ACTIVITIES .................................................................. 156 APPENDIX 3 - CAMPERS RULES IN SPANISH .......................................................................................... 159 APPENDIX 4 - CAMP MAP: FAMILY CAMP ............................................................................................. 160 APPENDIX 5 - GUIDE FOR CAMP TOUR EL PUERTO ............................................................................... 161 APPENDIX 6 –MAGIC VILLAGE MAP ..................................................................................................... 165 APPENDIX 7– LITTLE VILLAGE MAP ..................................................................................................... 166 APPENDIX 8– STAR CAMP MAP ............................................................................................................ 167 APPENDIX 9– SPORT CAMP MAP........................................................................................................... 168 APPENDIX 10– GO CAMP MAP .............................................................................................................. 169 TECS - Camp Manual 6
English Summer Camp
Mission Statements
TECS General Manager
Since the creation of TECS in December 1997 our objective has always been to offer the best education
and the highest quality of language learning activities for young people and adults. Believing that we can
always improve, our goal has always been to educate, train and serve.
This tradition in education is derived from being part of “The English Centre” (founded in 1969 by Linda
Randell and dedicated to education as a bilingual school). For decades the English Centre has been the
platform that various generations have chosen for the education of their children and TECS compliments
this educational opportunity with courses and activities of guaranteed effectiveness.
TECS was founded with a clear intention of continuous improvement.
TECS listens and takes into
account the opinions of our students, their families, our staff and the views of others outside our
organisation. This has allowed us to effectively organise courses and programmes through assessment of
current demands. We believe in continuous training and education as the basis of stability and in the daily
effort to give our best as an attitude towards life. That’s why our staff members are the linchpin of our
organisation and why we provide them with support systems to amalgamate professional development
with personal growth, making them feel part of a TECS community.
The structure of the different departments and their managers is designed to address each area and
aspect of the business (Summer camps, Language centres, Language Travels, and Homestay/Spanish in
Spain programmes) having their own team led by a director and with all the needed necessary support
departments (administration, family attention, bookings, promotion, communication, production and
support). We are aware that our work means continuous interaction with people who look for variety,
flexibility, and optimisation of resources in a society that is ever more plural and international; which leads
us to consider all the aspects that are involved in each course or activity so that they can produce only the
best result while adapting to each student’s needs.
The ever-growing advances, challenges and expectations of today are happening increasingly more
frequently than before, which in turn requires an ever growing amount of time. This is a challenge that
TECS understands very well as an organisation and it is taken into account when designing and
structuring our wide offer of courses and activities.
We dedicate resources to the development and innovation of our methodologies, activity organisation,
structures, facilities, course contents and new technologies. All of which nowadays are extremely
important in all aspects of life both personal and professional. That is why we progressively incorporate
such innovations into what we offer, so that they may be tools which enrich our organisation and the
service we provide to our increasingly demanding customers.
To conclude, the essence of a person is his/her education and experiences as they are fundamental to
achieving a better understanding between societies in a global world, broadening our horizons while
keeping root in our traditional values.
If every experience we have shapes us as a person, TECS does not hesitate to make a commitment to all
people who take part in our organisation through the courses and activities we design to encourage
integral education and training. This is why we continue to work at developing a better and more ample
offer of services to both clients and staff.
On my own behalf as the founder and on behalf of all our team we welcome you to come and participate in
TECS.
David Randell, TECS Founder and General Manager
TECS - Camp Manual 7
English Summer Camp
Director of Language Camps
All TECS Summer Camps seek to provide the best summer camp experience possible for all campers.
Our camps have been planned and designed to deliver quality English programmes where campers are
inspired to learn. We have never sought just to run our camps as they were run the year before, but rather
to improve ourselves with every year that passes. We seek from top to bottom to attend to the needs of
our campers. We know that camp offers a remarkable opportunity for a child not only to improve their
English but also to develop as an individual and that is why TECS strongly promotes educational
development of all types. We are also very aware of the demands that English speaking camp life puts on
Spanish campers and that is why we have always put Welfare Support as one of our top priorities.
For TECS, our staff have always been, and will continue to be, our number one commodity – as it is very
true that “happy staff = happy campers”. For this reason we have always sought hard to provide our staff
with what they “need” to do a great job. We have always placed great importance on pre-camp
information and recruitment, as we are aware that it is staff who know what they are “getting themselves
into” (the challenging parts even more so than the fun ones) who generally do the best job. Training has
also always been a top priority for us and over the years we have dedicated considerable time and
resources to developing the best training programmes we can. Whilst we know no training can ever
prepare someone perfectly for the start of camp, we also know that extensive skills training, “mentalization”
(as we call getting prepared for the challenges of camp) and plain important information giving will give
most of our staff the starting point they need to approach the challenges of camp life with confidence.
Nurturing a work environment of support is also a top priority for TECS. Nearly all our camp managers
were once TECS camp staff, meaning we have firsthand experience of how tough a staff member’s job
can be. For this reason we strive to work with our staff; supporting them when they have problems,
guiding them when they need lead and advising them whenever they need help. Saying this however
does not mean we do not expect a lot from our staff because we do as camp life can never run, let alone
well, without incredibly hardworking staff. We will expect our staff to always put the needs of our campers
first, but equally we will try our best to provide them with help whenever and however they need it. We
strive to create an environment of mutual understanding where people push in the same direction to
achieve the same goals which is why we place great importance on maintaining fluid but constructive
communication, a process we encourage our staff to positively play their part in achieving. Maintaining
staff morale throughout the incredible trials of the summer (which is admittedly not easy) has also always
been a key objective of ours which is why we encourage the organization of staff events and activities that
help create that feeling of togetherness and comradeship which is so needed on summer camp.
As final words, I can promise that TECS takes very seriously the product it delivers to its clients (campers
and parents), striving to deliver that service to the highest level possible. To achieve this, we ask a lot
from our staff but strive to do our best (but not the impossible) to provide them with what they need (not
want) to do the best job they can. We expect a lot but I also believe we give a lot and in most cases this is
noticed and appreciated by most staff (never all as that would be impossible), as they can see that we are,
on the whole, a company run by people who are dedicated and passionate about the product we provide,
something our large percentage of returnee staff would be testament to. Summer camp work is hard,
perhaps the most hours you will ever work, but it is also extremely rewarding and I believe TECS is a very
good summer camp organization to work for.
Douglas Haines, Director of Summer Camps
“I have worked on summer camps for every summer since I was 17. I have fulfilled a
variety of roles in many different camps, including, stating just a few: working as a
kitchen assistant in America, a monitor for PGL in France and Activity Coordinator and
Director for TECS. I have never lost my passion for camp and believe whole heartedly
that camp offers, for the right people, one of the most memorable summer experiences
possible. As Director of Language Camps, my primary goal is to make sure the campers
have a fantastic summer but I pursue this goal whilst also trying to play my part in
making as many staff as possible have as enjoyable summer as I did the first summer I
worked on camp”.
TECS - Camp Manual 8
English Summer Camp
Family Camp Director
TECS Family Camp in El Puerto de Santa Maria is the founding TECS summer camp and it is looking
th
forward to offering its vast learning opportunities to campers for the 12 straight summer. Since the first
camp in 1998, TECS has utilized a community of people who dedicate themselves to improving,
innovating, and developing the programs offered at Family Camp. At the heart of TECS philosophy is the
desire to create the family atmosphere that encourages the sense of loyalty and belonging.
The foremost key of Family Camp’s success is the enthusiasm, experience, and hard work of the monitors,
teachers, and managers who dedicate their summer months to providing quality care to the campers week
after week. The environment we create is one where children of all ages receive the pastoral care and
family environment necessary for English learning to take place. This year will see a clearer focus on
English learning outside of the classroom and we will seek to utilise the expertise of the great many TEFL
professionals we have on hand to disseminate end establish this culture. Particular attention will be paid
to the variety of learning styles exhibited by our campers and we will seek to find out how best to teach
them in and out of the classroom.
We will also continue striving to provide the best emotional support and personal growth opportunities for
our campers that struggle most by being away from home and in such an environment through programs
such as the I-Book and the Happy Passport. Attention paid to each facet of the campers experience on
camp is why Family Camp is a constant favourite amongst all age ranges.
We have a structure in place that has grown out of our vast experience of what we know works and we will
trust in that structure to represent the voice and concerns of every member of our team, reward those that
go beyond our expectations, and support those who need us most.
th
Liz Grabo, Family Camp Director ¨This summer with be my 5 summer
working at a TECS Summer Camp and will no doubt, be the most challenging.
My experience working year round at TECS as a teacher and Camp
Development and Recruitment Responsible has given me insight into the
formation of the programs and procedures that are instilled in TECS camps and
the knowledge and confidence to support managers and staff when running the
camp. The strains and pressures of a three age group camp with campers
ranging from 6 to 17 years of age, is no doubt a challenge, but it is also an
opportunity to give the campers, and also staff, the best summer of their lives.
Through our hours of hard work and the belief in what we do at TECS, this
summer will undeniably be the best Family Camp summer yet.¨
Sports Camp Director
Sports Camp is an essential part of TECS Summer Camps. Created in 2005, Sports Camp was the first
second TECS camp to open. The facilities are not as contemporary as in Family Camp, but thanks to its
unique setting, its genuine camp feeling, its great location only a few minutes away from the well known
Sancti Petri beach. The effort and enthusiasm shown by all former staff members, Sports Camp quickly
grew and became a summer experience loved by all: campers, staff and camper’s parents. In 2008 we
had over 280 kids on camp at a time, with around 100 staff members; a TECS all-time record.
After a short absence in 2009, Sport Camp in Sancti Petri is back this year with new structure, challenges
and opportunities. At Sports Camp, our aim is to offer the kids a mixture of sports activities, fun and
English classes in a healthy environment where values such as friendship, self-improvement, team spirit
and responsibility are an essential part of our educational program. The number of campers will be around
80 and one of our priorities will be delivering a high quality and fun summer experience, in both our sport
activities and our English Immersion program.
For the sport activities the kids can choose between a range of water sports or golf, in all cases with great
facilities and instructors, and always supervised by our monitors. The English Immersion program allows
the kids to improve their level of English by actually putting it into practice: the English classes combine
traditional grammar and vocabulary methods with conversation activities, games and discussions, and also
preparation for the activities that the campers will be doing in the next hours or days. We constantly try to
adapt the contents of the classes to the student’s favorite topics. By talking about topics they like, the kids
find the needed motivation to put effort into the learning progress and enjoy it. Our recipe for a successful
TECS - Camp Manual 9
English Summer Camp
summer is combining exciting activities (such as kite surf or golf) with interesting classes in small groups,
offering the right atmosphere to allow the kid’s personal growth and adding all our enthusiasm and
dedication.
Bosco Gracia, Sport Camp Director "This will be my fourth summer
working for TECS. I worked as welfare coordinator the first year, then as
Assistant Director the following two years and will be Camp Director this
summer, always at Sports Camp in Sancti Petri. I was born in Madrid,
and moved to Germany when I was 4 years old. Later on I also learned
English and French, so I know what a big challenge it is to learn a new
language. My own experience tells me that using the learned skills in
common situations is the best way of improving the confidence and level
of the students, and I think at Sports Camp we have a very good balance
between English classes and common situations where the kids can use
the new things learned at class. As TECS, I do strongly believe that a
successful summer camp is only possible with the best staff, and in the
importance of recruitment, training and support. That is why, as camp
director, I will provide that support and guidance, and try to make every single staff member feel
comfortable and valued by giving as much feedback and advice as possible. But most importantly I will try
to pass on to all the team my enthusiasm for summer camp, because I feel that if all the team is
enthusiastic about their jobs and roles, the camp will be a great success. I am sure that with our creativity,
enthusiasm, effort and dedication we will all manage to run a great summer camp full of experiences that
neither the kids nor ourselves will ever forget."
Little Village Director
Since its inception in 1997, The Educational Consortium of Spain has been at the forefront of English
language teaching and indeed has remained and reinforced its position on the vanguard of activity based
language learning through opening the doors to its new communicative 'Total English Immersion' camp at
Grazalema (Little Village) in 2008, the first of its kind in Spain. TECS 'Little Village' offers a different
approach to teaching through dispensing with traditional grammar lessons so often associated with the
mundane and stale classroom environment thereby offering a new challenge for those who are up for it.
TECS 'Little Village' is committed to academic excellence, personal development and cultural
enlightenment, enhanced by a diverse cognizant staff, as it strives to preserve and promote a stimulating
and intellectual environment and become the flagship camp of TECS:
Little Village Grazalema is located in the Sierra de Grazalema, 70km northeast of El Puerto de Santa
Maria and offers a nice change of pace to other camps. This is subsequently reflected in the whole
ambiance of camp and with a staff-camper ratio of approximately 1:5 Little Village is both unique and
conducive to English language learning. Grazalema itself is a picturesque ‘pueblo blanco’ and it lays claim
to some of the most spectacular vistas in Andalusia.
Little Village is different to the other TECS camps in that, prior to coming to camp, each and every camper
must present 1.) a signed declaration (by their English teacher either at school or by an EFL teacher from
a private academy attended in the evenings) stating that their level of English is of a high enough standard
that they can and will understand instruction in English and that they are more than capable of
communicating in English as well as 2.) a self-signed covenant promising to speak nothing but English for
the duration of their stay at camp. Essentially what this means is that from the moment the camper gets up
in the morning to the moment he/she goes to bed all communication is in English: Even when the campers
talk amongst themselves this must be done in English! It is for this reason that training has also always
been a top priority for TECS and considerable time and resources are dedicated to developing the best
training programmes so as to instill the importance of this concept to our monitors and teachers who play
such a crucial role in achieving the aims of the camp and who posses the expertise to ensure that the
Total English Immersion programme not only exceeds even our own expectations but that the whole camp
experience is one of great excitement, fun and fond memories. Academic excellence is rewarded through
the Young Achievers Award which also serves to foster a sense of accountability, responsibility and
maturity.
As at all TECS camps, the needs of the camper come first and Welfare Support provides the pastoral care
and emotional support the campers may require. Welfare Support is also made available for staff members
and great emphasis is placed on open, honest communication and dialogue among all staff members.
Summer camp work is a 24/7 endeavor and can, at times, be overwhelming. Hard work is noticed and
appreciated and ultimately rewarded. Additionally, considerable effort is made by all management
TECS - Camp Manual 10
English Summer Camp
personnel to ensure that staff have as good a summer as the camper, and given we want each and every
individual to leave camp with fond memories of TECS and the associated experiences, considerable effort
and resources are also channeled towards the organisation of staff events and activities to help create that
feeling of togetherness and camaraderie and to maintain staff morale.
Niall McCrory, Little Village Director, has been working with TECS Summer Camps since 2003; this
summer will represent his eighth consecutive summer at TECS and in all this time he has fulfilled a variety
of positions including EFL Teacher and Activity Coordinator. Additionally, although not an all-year-round
member of staff, he is committed to a number of other engagements for TECS both Dublin and Belfast as
well as preparing material for, and attending, post-camp review (November) and pre-camp planning (May)
weekends for senior management staff. Throughout the year he also liaises very closely with Head Office
staff, principally Douglas Haines and Liz Grabo so that each party is well versed on developments, ideas
and feedback regarding a particular area(s) concerning Little Village.
Niall is very passionate about his work and role at TECS and
wholeheartedly believes in what he does. As Director it is his duty to
instil this very genuine sense of belief and passion to fellow staff
members since they are the heartbeat of camp and the people
whom TECS surely could not exist. It is these very same people that
the campers will carry the fondest memories of and it is with a great
sense of pride that Niall associates himself with these people.
The Total English Immersion programme is the first of its kind in
Spain and it strives, in all earnestness, to promote a stimulating
and intellectual environment for the camper by creating an
atmosphere (both within and without the classroom) where the camper feels comfortable enough to
express him/herself freely so as to overcome the associated fears and trepidations that are commonplace
in the learning of a ‘foreign’ language.
Magic Village Director
Magic Village aims to create an environment for our campers that allows for a continuous sense of
learning and self-development within a cultural context. We want to provide our campers with not just the
core basics of the English language and camp life in general, we want to give them much more: the
cultural context of a language, a sense of enjoyment when they see how another language adds to their
personal development and how it helps them in understanding cultural expressions, traditions and leisure
activities of different people and nations, such as music, advertisements, films and literature.
Our staff play a crucial part in this as they are themselves the representations of various cultures. They
allow for meaningful interactions with the campers in English and can create a positive learning
environment where all are stimulated and motivated to learn through cultural emersion. A positive learning
environment can only be created when all are willing to dedicate themselves to this completely and allow
for reflection and improvement, which is why our staff are such a vital part of our programme.
We want to inspire our campers, make learning English and living camp life a positive experience, give
them the tools and skills they need to understand other cultures, live with other people from their culture
and other cultures, allow them to understand and show an interest in the cultural expressions of our
different nations and keep them engaged in cultural learning and development.
Magic Village runs a unique programme, which can make a tremendous difference in not just the lives of
our campers but also in the lives of our staff if we dedicate ourselves fully to it, are prepared to overcome
difficulties and see challenges as what they are: a chance to learn and improve ourselves and the
experience we try to give our campers.
Inge Hol, Magic Village Director, ¨I am from the Netherlands and although
I never received a bilingual education, I am, like so many people from the
Netherlands, bilingual in English and Dutch. I never went to academies or
English summer camps and I was never interested in studying the English
language at school. Yet I was very fortunate to grow up in a country that
believes in the power of languages and therefore treats every language as
something unique, be it English, French or any other language. We don’t
dub films or series on TV, the vast majority of the songs on radio stations
are English songs, we read Orwell in the original language when we’re
TECS - Camp Manual 11
English Summer Camp
sixteen and we use English expressions and words in our daily conversation with friends. That is how we
learn the English language and I believe this is the most natural and effective way of learning English. I am
extremely proud to be the director of our Natural English camp where we aim to create a similar
environment and where our campers can experience the power and most of all the enjoyment of a different
language. A camp that runs an English programme that was designed and created by Jo Papangelou
(TECS Teacher and TEFL Coordinator 2005-9), who has had a similar experience in learning the English
language. Really, truly learning a language cannot be done from studying a book again and again.
Languages need to be put into context, we need to provide people with the cultural exposure and let them
interact with it. In Magic Village our youngsters can experience firsthand the roads that open when we
speak another language and how much added value this can have to their lives.”
Star Camp Director
Every summer I spend at TECS, I find myself completely inspired and
optimistic, not only because of the great people I work with, the fantastic
program we ourselves run or the inevitable personal development one
undergoes at camp. I find myself inspired and optimistic because of the
campers themselves, and their endless ability to adapt to a new
environment, their intuition to console one another while working as a group
and their creativity and perseverance when communicating in a second
language. Although I’ve taught all age groups on camp, and each has its
advantages and disadvantages, I must say it has to be the Senior age group
that most motivates me to return each year, hoping to share just a few
glimmering weeks with them as they take a few more steps toward
becoming the young adults.
I have a passion for working with teenagers, and I feel somewhat honored to play a part in their formative
years. Who doesn’t remember a high school teacher who changed their life, if even in just one small way?
As teenagers, we start to shape our lives by testing boundaries, learning responsibility and by using our
incredible optimism (or idealism?) and creativity to make decisions. Teenagers, if given the opportunity,
will make the choices which will form their (and our) futures.
This is the reason I wholeheartedly believe in the Guided Independence Program. We, in effect, give them
the liberty to choose their own paths, while guiding them along the way. We treat them as adults, younger
siblings in a way, sharing our own experiences and tips with them and acting as role models. The campers
make their own choices, and benefit or suffer from the consequences of these choices.
Star Camp is different from other camps; we stay in a 4 star hotel (where we must respect the other
guests), the discipline program is totally different (the “punishments” are not as straight forward), and the
campers enjoy an unprecedented amount of free-time (meaning campers have the freedom to some things
they can´t do in other camps). I perceive these differences as challenging opportunities to make a real
difference in the lives of these teens. I see Star Camp as a type of “retreat” where they can learn to be
independent, a character trait Spanish people don’t generally develop until they’re much older. I’m looking
forward to inspire and be inspired by everyone, campers and staff alike!
Christina Jones, Star Camp Director, ¨This will be my fifth summer working with TECS summer camps.
Each year brings new challenges and new memories. I have worked as a teacher and a TEFL
Coordinator at both Family Camp and Little Village. I have worked with every age group on camp, and
know first -hand that each age has its advantages and disadvantages.
I live and work as an English teacher in Seville, and am truly passionate about my work. I feel that working
at TECS in the summer gives me a unique opportunity to improve my teaching skills in a unique team
oriented atmosphere and to participate fully in the lives of children. I completely believe in the work that
we do and feel that our work is incredibly important for the future of the world.
I am looking forward to working again with teenagers, especially in an environment in which these qualities
are recognized and valued. I know it won’t be an entirely smooth journey, but I know that if we make a
difference in the life of just one camper, we will have done this world a great favor!¨
TECS - Camp Manual 12
English Summer Camp
Go Camp Director
In the American Camping Organization, parents were asked what concerns them most when they send
their children off to summer camps. Many answers came up: “will the activities be safe?”, “will they enjoy
themselves?”, “will the monitor make sure they eat well?”, “will they be able to sleep at night?”, “will they
miss me?” to name but a few. The organization then set its minds to defining a short statement that could
summarise in one catchy phrase what parents felt and feared. What they came up with was: “who will
care when I am not there?” Who will care that my child is safe? Who will care that they eat well? Who will
care that they put on sunscreen? Who will care that they are enjoying themselves? Who will care that
they are comforted when unhappy? All of this was summarised in this one great statement. In all TECS
summer camps we of course care about all of these things but if there is one camp which puts even more
emphasis on this area than any other then that is Go Camp.
In Go Camp the whole programme is structured around placing welfare support as the absolute number 1
priority. We strive to provide the campers with such a comfortable experience on camp that they will
embrace the summer camp experience for years to come. To achieve this objective we have put in place
a welfare programme and booklet and also opened up a more fluent communication channel between
camp and parents but most significantly of all we have designed a daily programme where the mixed
usage of English and Spanish is embraced. In Go Camp we strive to make the most of the benefits of
using both languages, a child will have the comfort of starting and ending their day in their mother tongue
and will have the security that daily routine is mostly dealt with in this language meaning in important
welfare moments no communication barrier will exist. The fact that monitor staff are Spanish nationals
also adds a greater cultural understanding depth that can be important in tough moments, especially those
first days on camp.
English is of course given its place with the classes in the morning being a full English environment as in
all camps and also all organized group activities like Creative Projects and Evening Entertainments being
carried out completely in English. However this is not to say that it is inevitable that less English will be
learned in this camp than others, but that is a price we are prepared to pay to ensure that this camp is the
pinnacle TECS camp in welfare and individual attention given to each camper. It should be noted that for
most Go Camp campers this will be their first camp experience which is why they have selected this mixed
language experience which is why of course we are determined it will not be their last as our one of our
main aims is to make sure they enjoy their GO Camp experience so much that they feel ready next year to
more onto other TECS Camps.
So what do I scream to the parents when I hear them think: “who will care when I am not there?”: “I WILL, I
WILL and every GO CAMP STAFF MEMBER WILL” as there is not many more honourable things to do
than help develop a child which is exactly what we aim to do at Go Camp.
Maria Canos, Go Camp Director ¨I am Maria Canos and I have been
teaching languages and working with children for nearly 15 years. This is
my second Summer Camp with TECS and I am ready to take the challenge
of starting a new camp and I am also confident GO CAMP will succeed for
its uniqueness. GO CAMP is the Camp where campers will not only learn
English but the experience will contribute even more to their Personal
Development. GO CAMP will make these children’s first experience in a
Language Camp a much more relaxed and smooth experience and will also
get them ready for the big jump into the amazing world of TECS! The extra
Welfare attention given to these campers will ensure fun at all times. Time
for English will mean Time for Fun!¨
TECS - Camp Manual 13
English Summer Camp
Chapter 1: My Arrival on Camp
Some Basic Questions You Might Have on Arrival at Camp
The Monday of Training Week is Staff Arrivals day. Staff will be arriving throughout the
day. Training doesn’t start until Tuesday and Monday represents a day to orientate
yourself around our facilities and the area. Below are some questions that may help
you answer some of the questions that you might have on arrival.
Please also during your stay don’t hesitate to ask any of our Management Team any
additional questions you may have. They will be running all the sessions during
training week and should be immediately recognisable as the people wearing the
TECS t-shirts!
Please note that preparation for camp is on-going at the moment. Less than 4 days
ago the school was set up as a Bi-Lingual school for 800 children and the maintenance
and cleaning teams are working incredibly hard to convert the installations into how we
want them for the Summer Camp. This means that everything might not immediately
be quite as we would like them so please bear with us as this work goes on.
What happens today?
Throughout today staff will be arriving. Training starts tomorrow (Tuesday). Today
lunch will be served in the dinning hall at 15.00 and dinner at 21.00. At 22.30 for those
who wish we will be meeting on the Front Lawn to go for a quick drink.
Breakfast will be at 09.30 tomorrow morning and thereafter the first meeting in the gym
at 10.30. Please make sure that you bring this manual to this meeting.
What can I do today?
It is not a bad idea to take some time to walk into town and acquaint yourself with the
area.
To get to the nearest beach go out the gates and straight over the roundabout down
the hill. This isn’t the most beautiful beach in town but a good starting point. To get
there follow the round down the hill, straight over the first roundabout and then at the
second roundabout turn right and walk for about 500m to the beach. It’s about a 15
minute walk.
To get to the city centre go out the gates and turn left , continue straight ahead passing
a roundabout and at the second roundabout (having the hospital on your left) turn left
and continue straight on until you arrive at the Bull Ring. Go to the back of the Bull
Ring and go straight on to the square with the Church. It takes about 30 minutes to
walk there from camp.
Turning right out the gates will take you in about 5 minutes up to a small commercial
centre with bars for coffee etc (beyond the commercial centre there isn’t much.
TECS - Camp Manual 14
English Summer Camp
Bear in mind Spanish shops close for the siesta between 14.00 and 17.30, though
some cafes will be open during this time.
And of course you can take some time to read this manual and prepare yourself
for training week!!!!!
When do I have to wear my staff t-shirts?
During training week you don’t have to wear your staff t-shirt. After that the t-shirts are
worn as follows:
Red Polos with beige shorts:
During Arrival and Departure Days
On excursions at the weekends
Blue / White Staff T-Shirt:
At all other times when on duty including during all
sports sessions (you can not go bare-chested
except when supervising swimming sessions)
When not on duty staff can wear their own clothes
Where do I sleep during training week?
Everyone has allocated sleeping arrangements on camp during training week and we
ask that you respect these in order to help make things easier for the maintenance and
cleaning staff preparing the camp facilities for the first camper Arrivals Day.
During camp everyone lives on site. From time to time you may be asked to change
where you sleep for logistical reasons, so please be open to this.
Please note that whilst most of the bedrooms in Family Camp have air conditioning,
this is NOT left on overnight as it is incredibly bad for your health and only serves to
spread sore throats and colds due to breathing in re-cycled air every night.
Can I have alcohol on site?
No. Not during training week or at any time during the camp. For common sense
reasons, given our responsibilities in caring for the children, having alcohol on site is
seen as a serious disciplinary issue.
Is there a fridge?
Yes there is a fridge staff can use in the staff room. Please make sure you clearly
mark what is yours and you work together to keep it clean. Every year it becomes dirty
and the simple reason is that people won’t take an extra 5 seconds to clean up after
themselves! Please make this year different!!!
Please don’t store food in your room / tent. The campers are not allowed to do this and
you shouldn’t either. Spanish ants are experts at tracking down food in rooms and
tents and they won’t take long to find yours!
TECS - Camp Manual 15
English Summer Camp
Where can I smoke?
You can only smoke in designated areas. In Family Camp this is the area outside the
staff room. Please note that you can only smoke during your time off and can not
choose to take “a quick ciggie” when you feel like it as this is unfair to other staff
members who may have to cover for you in your absence.
Are there any phones I can use?
Yes you can use the pay phones on the wall outside reception. International calling
cards, which allow you to make cheap international calls from these phones can be
bought at any of the Green Kiosks that you see around town.
Please note that during camp your time for making and receiving (non-emergency)
phone calls is ONLY during your time off. This means that you really don’t need to be
carrying your mobile around with you and we certainly don’t want to see staff messing
around texting when they are looking after kids!
Any person calling you during working hours regarding a non emergency matter will be
asked to leave a message and then a note of who called will be left in the staff mail
box. You should make sure to inform the secretaries any time you are expecting
phone calls during your free time so that they realise you are not working at these
times and are free to take the call.
Where can I park my car / motorbike?
In Family Camp there are no parking facilities on camp for staff due to our need to use
the bus park for sports during camp. Therefore please park off site. You can park in
the lay bays right next to camp. Up to now we have not heard of any car break ins.
When is laundry done?
Laundry for staff is collected once a week and returned a few days following,
depending on the demands of the cleaning staff. TECS is not responsible for any lost
or damaged clothing. If staff wish, they may take it to a laundry facility of their choice at
the cost of the individual.
TECS - Camp Manual 16
English Summer Camp
Chapter 2: Training Week
IMPORTANT: Training week for ALL camps is at the Family Camp site in El Puerto de
Santa Maria. Staff will go to their assigned camps later in the week.
The training week is designed to introduce you to the demands and challenges that
await you this summer. The sessions are mixed, from practical instruction based
workshops to those where you as the trainee will take on a more instructive role. You
will also have time to prepare your classes for when the campers arrive.
The days are intense and we recognise that there is a lot of information to take in.
Please take time to familiarise yourself with the pre-session reading as referred to on
the following pages, prior to each session so that the sessions are as instructive as
possible.
In many ways the training week is a concentrated introduction to camp life, aimed at
bonding you as a team and getting you used to the reality of following a long, but fun
filled timetable on a daily basis. There are of course many fun activities planned that
will give you ample opportunity to get to know your fellow workers. Each night there
are social occasions off site that we have organised for you, we hope they will allow
you to socialise with each other on a more informal level.
We don’t shy away from recognising that there will be little that we will tell you during
the training week that is rocket science, but hopefully there will be a lot of times when
you will be able to think “hey that sounds like a good idea, why didn’t I think of that”.
Experience has shown that those who sit there thinking that it is all just common sense
and they know it all, in fact often don’t and they tend to struggle when the kids come
along because they haven’t really mentally prepared themselves for the challenges of
working with foreign language children in a camp setting.
So please participate to the full and ask sensible questions. Like everything on camp
the more you put into it, the more you as an individual and the group as a whole will get
out of it. We also recognise that all of you will bring different skills and experiences to
camp. Please share these skills with your fellow staff members. No one knows all the
answers, but by working together we are sure we can make a pretty good effort at
solving any problem that comes our way.
Important Training Information for Sports Camp, Go Camp, Magic Village, Little Village,
and Star Camp Staff
Please note that the majority of training takes place on our camp in Family Camp.
Training on Tuesday June 29th- Thursday July 1st will take place in Family Camp. On
Friday the 2nd Little Village, Go Camp, Sport Camp and Magic Village staff will move
by coach there respective camps, where they will stay for the rest of the summer. Star
Camp staff will go to Star Camp on Saturday the 3rd of July. All staff must have all their
possessions packed ready to leave for the morning they are set to depart.
TECS - Camp Manual 17
Days and Times TECS Can’t use GYM
Monday: 15.00-21.00. GYM LEFT CLEAN AT 14.00.
Can be set up for intercamp at 21.30.
COLOUR KEY
Yellow: Meals or Breaks
White: General Meetings (all staff)
Orange: Monitors ONLY
Pink: Teachers ONLY
Green: Pub Quiz
Blue: Other Social Events
Red LINES: times gym NOT available.
Abbreviation Key
LV: = Little Village Camp, MV = Magic Village –
SC = Sports Camp, STC = Star Camp
FC = Family Camp, GO = Go Camp.
Soph= Sophmores, Pion = Pioneers Jun = Juniors,
Sen =Seniors.
WARNING THE COPY IN THE MANUAL IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY – Times and sessions are
subject to change. Please look at your copy given to you when you arrived.
Training Week Schedule
TUESDAY
09.0009.45
Breakfast
10.00
INTRODUCTIONS and OBJECTIVES of TRAINING
WEEK (Director of Language Camps) Gym
11.0011.45
CAMP INTRODUCTIONS, FC done by AGE GROUP
(Camp Directors + Camp management)
11.4513.40
MONITORS- COMMUNICATION AND FOREIGN
LANGUAGE LESSON: Gym
(Head Act Coords: Sandra and Sam)
13.4014.00
11.4512.00
12.0014.00
RENFORCEMENT OF TEFL TECHNIQUES +
ENGLISH CONTROL (DIRECTORS –INGE) Gym
General intro to Teachers about being camp Teacher?
(inge) Audiovisual
Typical Summer Camp Class run by each TEFL
Coordinator in own classroom (Get to know you done
as part of of class)
WEDNESDAY
08.0008.45
09.00
10.1511.00
11.0011.30
11.30
-14.00
LV: example class + objective based learning.
Including all TEFL MONITORS
- don’t forget to use short example class videos.
English Summer Camp
10.0013:30
Breakfast
COLOUR WAR (FC,LV,STC,SC)
(Camp Directors + Activity Coordinators) + TRAINING
GAMES (Ast Coordinators) Gym
HOUSE COMPETITION (MV+GO)
(Camp Directors + Activity Coordinators + TRAINING
GAMES (Ast Coord) - Park
• How to make the most of one’s master pack?
(FC,GO,STC,SC) (Liz) – Audivis 10.15-11-00
• L.V: How to make the most of your communicative
manual? (Jill) – L.V. TEFL Coord classroom.
• MV: How to make the most of your Natural English
Packs? (Alex) - MV. TEFL Coord classroom.
TEACHERS ONLY: SHORT BREAK
PLANNING and SHARING RESOURCES (All):
+ Introduce how planning time works in camp?
(with TEFL Coordinators in classrooms)
MV: Preparing assigned English Action session
MONITORS: How to run a good activity session? (All
monitors attend for group control ex.class)
Gym (Sandra + Sam)
Assignments for doing sports on Thursday (only FC,LV
and MV) and Friday (only FC).
(Sandra + Sam)
12.00-12.15 FC, SC, ST, GO in Audiovisual
THURSDAY
LEARNING CAMP CHANTS FOR INTERCAMP
COMP and introducing features of the comp. (Ast
Coords)
14.20
-15.00
STAFF PERFORMANCES in age groups or in Houses
for MV and GO. (Staff only)
Introduced by Ast. Coordinators
15.00
Lunch
At some point at lunch Coords will teach “Animal song
and “Everybody dance now” (Ali + returnee cords)
13.3014.00
MONITORS ONLY: SHORT BREAK
14.00
GENERAL WELFARE INTRO (MARIA+DAVID N)
Gym
WELFARE and DISCIPLINE in age groups by camp.
(Coordinators but lead by Welfare Coords)
Gym
11.0012.00
DEMANDS of JOB, MORALE and PROBLEMS –
(Director of Language Camps)
Gym
12.00-30
How to run the best set projects? (Inge) Gym
12.3013.15
TEACHERS: PLANNING and SHARING RESOURCES
Focus on the sessions above (with TEFL Coordinators
in classrooms).
MV: example sessions taught and feedback.
11:30 13.15
SPECIALIST MONITORS: Extra activities training (All
SC+STC monitors + sailing, tennis and horse riding in
FC) – Thomas, Tristina and Ella (some parts together
other separate) – class.
GO: Special Training in Welfare (Maria+Greg)
14.15
14.00
15.00
Lunch
At some point at lunch Coords will teach Banana song
and “MEREKEDE” – (Ali + returnee cords)
TOUR and Talk through CAMP PROCEDURES and
DAILY TIMETABLE in age groups by camp.
(Activity and TEFL Coordinator + Welfare)
FC – here in Puerto
Check with coordinators
All other camps doing virtual tours and then talk
through day in classroom (done by Directors,
TEFL Coords and Act Coords together).
ST use FC’s projector
16.00
Structure of how medical procedures work on each
camp?
(Maria + Nurses) Gym
17.00.
17.30
17.0017.30
17.3019.30
Intro of English Day FC,MV,SC+STC (INGE) Gym
Then split by camp at 17.15 (Tefl Coords/directors)
GO: How parent’s day will work on this camp? (Maria)
L.V: How to run the best educational projects? (Jill)
• FC (Soph+Jun) + GO: How to run the best Arts and
Crafts Classes? Assignments for A+C on Thurs
(GO+FC) and Fri (FC ONLY). Swamp (Ella).
• FCSen:How to run the best Project Sessions? Time
for planning projetcs– Zone (Sam)
• MV: How to run the “Creative Projects”. Also time
for planning sessions. (Sandra) - class
• STC: Running competitions during chill out? (Tris).
Time to plan competitions - class
• LV: How to use the learner card out of class (Sorcha
+Niall+Jill) - class
• L.V: 17-18: How to enforce Total English and TEFL
Tips?,class
In TEFL Coords rooms
18.3019.30
19.30
BREAK – MAKE SURE TO BUY THOSE TOILETRIES
YOU FORGOT TO BRING WITH YOU!
Initiative games (first part of intercamp comp) –
competing by camp and by age group in FC.
17.3018.15
18.1519.30
17.3018.15
•
FC,MV,STC,SC,GO: How to Plan Evening Ents and
Excursion Classes? (Kylie) – Gym
PLANNING and SHARING RESOURCES (ALL):
- Intro classroom set up and mention
dynamics for your camp?
18.1519.30
•
•
19.30
Dinner
INTERCAMP STAFF COMP(Ast Cords) WE
ENCOURAGE STAFF TO REST UP THIS NIGHT
17.15
-18.15
21.00
22.30
Also: MV: Intro how to do the media classes? Then
teachers preparing assigned English Media
Sessions
Also STC: How to run communicative part of class?
(Chris J) – TEFL Coord Room.
“Capture the Flag” followed by “It´s a Knockout”
(Returnee Coordinators: Ali, Thomas and Nick) Park
Dinner
CAMP QUIZES: FC: at ?, LV+MV: at ?, STR,SP+GO: at
?(Ast Cord)
STAFF PERFORMANCES (as Tuesday). (Staff only)
To be decided
QUICK INTRO TO TEACHERS ON CHALLENGES OF
A MONITORS’ JOB - Niall + Liz + Bosco present Gym
QUICK INTRO TO MONITORS ON CHALLENGES OF
A TEACHERS’ JOB Gym- Inge +Chris J +Maria present
• Monitors giving assigned SPORTS classes or ARTS
and CRAFTS classes. (FC, MV+LV) (Activity
Coordinators) GYM NOT AVAILABLE
• ALL SPECIALIST MONITORS (LIST AS 11.30-13.15)
How to do transfers? (ELLA )
• GO: special training in Parental Communication Maria
+Greg)
17.1518.15
TEACHERS: PLANNING and SHARING RESOURCES
(with Tefl Coordinators) including ONE TO ONE
MEETINGS BETWEEN EACH TEACHER AND TEFL
MV: example sessions taught and feedback.
LV: First session (another on Friday) on the level test
and covert leaving test, (Jill)
18.1519.15
19.1520.30
(Returnee Coordinators: Ali, Thomas and Nick)
Park
21:00
22.0000.00
17.00
19.1519.45
Soph FC: TECS Happy Passport (Muir+Soph Coords)
Jun FC: I-Book (Nick+Jun Coords) class
MV: English Star Award (Sandra+MV Coords) class
LV+STC: Young Achievers Awards (Niall+Chris J+Tris)
GO: Thumbs Up Booklet (Maria+cords) class
SC: Difficulties of sharing a site (Bosco) class
Sen FC: Working on zone preparation
CAMP PHOTO
(all staff present. I.Ts bring digital cameras)
Lunch
At some point at lunch Jill will teach her TECS song.
15.00
16.00
16.00
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BREAK – last opportunity to go to supermarket before
going to LV,MV, SC and GO.
•
•
•
•
FC, LV and MV: same as above
STC: Present competition ideas for chill out (Tris)
GO training in how to mix language of this camp (Ali)
SC: Reviewing dynamics of two age groups (Thomas)
• Being the best teacher outside of the classroom? (Kylie)
(SC,STC,FC,MV), Audio-Visual
• How to enforce Total English and being the best
Teacher outside of the classroom? (Jill) LV
• GO: Special training of teachers unique role (Maria)
19.4520.30
Controlling Classes: Using Rewards and Incentives in
the classroom? Classroom Setup (Inge) Audio-Visual
20.30
-21.00
Using songs on Camp (Jill + Ali)
Gym!
21.00
22.0000.00
Dinner
MOVIE NIGHT (Ast Coords) - WE ENCOURAGE
STAFF TO REST UP THIS NIGHT.
SUNDAY– Family Only
9.30
Breakfast
For attention of Returnee monitors (Only
people who partook in last year’s training
week as sports monitors and have not
changed age group this year)
Changes in your timetable CONSULT ACT
CORDs.
10.30
Arrivals Meeting –
*MANAGEMENT STAFF ONLY*
(Camp Director)
The Ant Hill
11.00
Arrivals Meeting and final set up duties –
ALL STAFF
(Camp Director)
The Ant Hill
SATURDAY STAR CAMP:
11.30
LAST SET UP TASKS
12.00
Everyone to stations
12.30
Arrivals: see programme
SPORT CAMP STAFF LEAVE FOR SPORTS CAMP
9.00
9.15
Showers
Tent/Room inspection
(Welfares)
9.30
Breakfast
10.0014.30
TEACHERS: PLANNING and SHARING
RESOURCES
(with TEFL Coordinators in classrooms)
AND IF NEEDED: Last Meetings and Planning (TEFL
Coord)
•
•
•
•
•
Monitors giving assigned SPORTS classes or ARTS
and CRAFTS classes. (FC,LV and MV)
(Activity Coordinators) GYM AVAILABLE: 12.30 – 13.15
11.3013.15
13.1514.00
SATURDAY– Family + Star only
Wake up call (Coord)
Breakfast
11.3013.15
14.00
-14.20
FRIDAY – Family + Star only
8.30
09.0009.45
Specialist Training Sessions – refer to general timetable for main info, below are extras
Adventure Monitors: will be trained on Thursday at 16.00-18.30. Adv Camp will go there on Wednesday to be trained there.
Nurse Monitors: will meet with the Nurse and Assistant Directors/Welfare Coords Thursday at 11.30-13.30.
Music and Dance: will meet with Specialist Coordinators on Wednesday 12.00-14.00. They will have the Thursday and
Friday sports times to work on development of Music and Dance Programme. They will also meet with the Diretcor of
Language Camps at a time to be arranged (Spec Coord – please ask in C.O.)
Basketball: will do all normal monitor training sessions. But they will meet with the Diretcor of Language Camps at a time to
be arranged (Spec Coord – please ask in C.O.)
Admin Monitor: Will be with Camp Director in Camp Office on Thursday and Friday during sports/A+C time, except when
doing own practice A+C session.
Ast. Welfare Coordinator: see management training timetable.
TEFL Monitor: Tuesday 12.00-14.00, Saturday 16.30-17.30
10.00
-13.00
BREAKFAST: 09.30-10.30 (OPTIONAL)
LOAD BUS: 11.00-12.00 (REQUIRED)
DEPART 12.00
EXPECTED ARRIVAL: 13.30-14.00
UNLOAD BUS AND FIND ROOMS:
13.30/14.00-15.00
Monitors giving assigned SPORTS or ARTS and
CRAFTS classes
(Activity and Specialist Coordinators)
GYM NOT AVAILABLE – ALL SPORTS OUTSIDE
Star CAMP: Putting to bed, lists, control for
Hotel, Tips and techniques.OR ASSIGNED BY
ACT CORD(tristina)
13.0014.30
ARTS and CRAFTS: monitors doing sessions
Star CAMP: WORKING ON PRE TASKS OR
TRAINING AS ASSIGNED BY ACT CORD(tris)
14.30
Table control in age groups by camp (Act Cords)
Include Freeze + thumb master and other table games.
15.00
Lunch
16.0030
EXCURSIONS
(Liz) Gym
16.30
CONTROL of YOUNGER CHILDREN ON
EXCURSION and KEEPING KIDS IN LINES:(Scott
and Muireanne)
Star CAMP : KEEPING KIDS HAPPY IN A HOTEL
ENVIRONMENT (Cristina/ Tristina)
17.0017.30
17.3018.15
Leader Bonding – Soph and Juniors E.P(Nick &Scott)
Zone Control – Seniors Star + Family (Sam + Tris)
PACKING AND UNPACKING AND LAUNDRY AND
LOST PROPERTY (Guillermo) Gym
18.1518.45
18.4519.30
15.00
Lunch
16.00
-17.30
16.00
-16.30
16.30
17.30
CAMP SET UP DUTIES
(Directors) Gym
TEACHER’s ROLE IN ARTS AND CRAFTS (Ella) –
Sop+Jun. + PROJECTS (Sam)
LEVEL TESTING, FIRST DAY PROCEDURES and
LEVEL CHANGING – STARTING + LEAVING TESTS
Each TEFL Coord in classrooms
Includes all TEFL MONITORS
FIRE PROCEDURE (DIRECTORS)
17.30
18.0018.30
STAR CAMP
PLEASE SEE
NEXT PAGE.
ARRIVAL and CIRCLE GAMES (Act Coords)
PUTTING to BED and GETTING UP (Sam) Gym
TALK THROUGH ALL THE REMAINING EVENING
ACTIVITIES PER EVENT (BY EACH AGE GROUP
ACT COOR) Gym
17.3018.00
SUMMARY OF PACKING AND PUTTING TO BED
SESSIONS SPECIALLY FOR TEACHERS (Kylie)
Audiovisual
18.0019.30
TIME FOR CLASSROOM SET UP AND LAST
PLANNING
18.3019.00
TALK THROUGH OTHER EVENTS OF ARRIVALS
DAY (Activity and TEFL Coordinator)
By age group
19.0019.30
ARRIVALS DAY (Directors)
19.3021.00
STATIONS Run through of Arrivals.
AND SET UP but must be close to assigned area.
19.3020.15
FEEDBACK ON TRAINING WEEK (including training
week slideshow done by IT)
ALSO REMAINING QUERIES and ANYTHING
PENDING in age groups by camp.
(Activity and TEFL Coordinator + Welfare)
Check with coordinators
20.15
INTERNATIONALLY FAMOUS MASCOT RELAY
TECS - Camp Manual 18
2 REPRESENTATIVES OF Camp Management
VERSUS ON HARD WORKING C.O. SECS(Sam)
21.00
22.30
Dinner
MEET FRONT LAWN
TO GO TO BEACH
21.00
Dinner
•
•
English Summer Camp
Training Week (MV, LV, SC + GO – Friday to Sunday, STC: Sunday)
FRIDAY THIS IS A LONG DAY. SLEEP WELL THE NIGHT BEFORE.
8.30
9.30
Wake up call (Act Coords)
Breakfast
10.00
Pack all equipment and bags into the bus to leaveALL STAFF NEEDED TO HELP WITH LOADING.
On the bus ready to go to camps.
11.00
ESTIMATED JOURNEY LENGTH: 1 hour to GO, 2
HOURS TO LV + MV.
12-13.30 eat
From arrival to
15.00
15.00
Arrival to Camp:
Unpack bus + camp set up – PLEASE TAKE IT FOR
GRANTED EVERYTHING WONT BE PERFECTLY
SET UP FOR WHEN YOU ARRIVE. THIS IS DUE
TO OBVIOUS TIME LIMITS. ALL STAFF HELP GET
CAMP READY SO WE CAN START WITH
TRAINING AGAIN AFTER LUNCH. SOME
RETURNEES MAY CONTINUE WITH SET UP
ALSO AFTER LUNCH
Lunch Table control games done during lunch (by
Sandra in MV, Ali in Go and Sorcha in LV)
Little Village:
•
16.00-16.30: Excursions (Niall)
•
16.30-17.15: Packing + Laundry (Sorcha)
•
17.15-17.45: Putting to Bed (including cabin time) (Sorcha)
•
17.45-18.15: Zone Control (Sorcha + Jill):
•
18.15-19.30: MONT: Talk through remaining Even Ents (Sorcha)
•
18.15-18.45: TEACH: Set up TEFL Office (Jill)
•
18.45-19.30: TEACH: English Day Walk (Jill)
•
19.30-20.15: Feedback on Training + Slide Show (Niall+Support)
•
20.15-21.00: Settle into own rooms
Magic Village +Sports Camp
•
16.00-16.30: Excursions (Director)
•
16.30-17.15: Packing + Laundry (Act Coords)
•
17.15-17.45: Putting to Bed (Act Coords)
•
17.45-18.15: MV: House Competition time daily (Sandra+ Alex):
•
17.45-18.15: SC ALL: Phone call time supervision (Andrea)
•
18.15-19.30: MONT: Talk through remaining Even Ents (ActCord)
•
18.15-18.45: MV TEACH: Intro Crocodile Park and Sea Life (Alex)
•
18.45-19.30: MV TEACH: Set Up Class, 18.15-19.30: SC TEACH
SET UP.
•
19.30-20.00: Leader Bonding + phone control (ActCord)
•
20.00-20.45: Feedback on Training + Slide Show (Dir+Support)
•
20.45-21.00: Settle into own rooms
GO Camp
•
16.00-16.30: ALL: Excursions (Maria)
•
16.30-17.15: MONT: Packing + Laundry (Ali+Greg)
•
17.15-17.45: MONT: Putting to Bed (Ali+Greg)
•
17.45-18.15: MONT: House Competition time (Ali)
•
18.15-19.00: MONT: Talk through remaining Even Ents (Ali)
•
19.00-19.45: MONT: Leader Bonding + phone control (Ali+Greg)
•
16.30-17.15: TEACH: Summary of Monitor roles (Ali)
•
17.15-19.45: TEACH: Planning and Class Set Up (Maria)
•
19.45-20.30: ALL: Feedback on Training + Slideshow(Dir+Support)
•
20.30-21.00: Settle into own rooms
21.00
Dinner
22.00
MEET TO GO FOR DRINKS
WARNING THE COPY IN THE MANUAL IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY – Times and sessions are
subject to change. Please look at your copy given to you when you arrived.
SATURDAY
09:30
Staff leave on Friday morning to go to the relevant camp
to finish off their training and set up camp.
Make sure that you have packed all your things to be
ready to leave Friday!
Breakfast
SUNDAY – MV, LV + GO
9.30
11.00-15
11.15-14.00
SUNDAY – STAR
Breakfast
Set up duties meeting
SET UP DUTIES
13.30: Arrivals Meeting –
*MANAGEMENT STAFF ONLY*(Camp Director)
15.00
Lunch
Same as General
Timetable
14:00
Lunch
14.00 LUNCH
14.30-45
Arrivals Meeting –
*MANAGEMENT STAFF ONLY*
(Camp Director)
14.30-15.15: Arrivals Meeting and final set up duties–
ALL STAFF
(Camp Director)
14.45
-15.15
Arrivals Meeting and final set up duties–
ALL STAFF
(Camp Director)
15:15
Everyone to stations
Arrivals: see programme
15:15 Everyone to stations
Arrivals: see programme
Except: 16.00-16.30: Teachers with set
up.
21.00
Dinner
TECS - Camp Manual 19
English Summer Camp
WARNING THE COPY IN THE MANUAL IS FOR REFERENCE ONLY
– Times and sessions are subject to change. Please look at your copy
given to you when you arrived.
Notes
Notes: CAMP SUPPORT, when not in a specific task or session, go to office to help with admin tasks.
NURSES: When not in sessions, finish off preparation of infirmary
Ast Welfare Coords: When not in sessions or training, please familiarise with the procedures and roles and
responsibilities
Training Week Welfare Coords, Assistant Welfare Coords, Nurse, Crew
Members, Camp Support (Review for training purposes: Camp + Ast Director +
Ast Coord)
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
THURSDAY
09.00 – 09:45
Breakfast
09.00 – 09:45
Breakfast
09.00 – 09:45
Breakfast
09:45
09:45 FC Camp Support Report to Camp
Sec for transfers duties
INTRODUCTIONS and OBJECTIVES of
TRAINING WEEK Douglas GYM
ALL
10:00
10:00
LV/ FC If possible Camp Support go to first
session and then report to Camp Sec
DEMANDS of JOB, MORALE and
PROBLEMS
(Director of Language Camps)
Gym ALL
Age Group Introductions
All Coordinators
11.00-12.00
FC Camp Support Report to Camp Sec for
transfers and duties
COLOUR WAR
(Camp Directors + Activity Coordinator) +
TRAINING GAMES (Ast Coordinators)
Gym ALL
HOUSE COMPETITON For Adventure
Camp
OBSERVACIONES
(On call pick ups of
(Ass Director)
Nurse 10:00 –
Welfares and Ast
12:00)
Welfare Coords
Others: Report to
Admin C.O
11:30 – 13:00
10.00-11.00
11:00 – 11:45
11.45-14.00
MONITORS- COMMUNICATION AND FOREIGN
LANGUAGE LESSON Gym
Welfare Coords and Assistant Welfare Coords
involved too
14.00-15.00
Preparation Time for sessions with staff
15.00
Lunch
10.00
12.00-14.00
Daily Timetable
and
Responsibilities
(Ast Director) for
Ast Welfare Coord
14.00-15.00
WELFARE and DISCIPLINE in age groups
by camp, all staff.
(Welfares)
Gym
15.00
Lunch
10.00
11..30-12:45
Nurse Monitor Training
procedures and timetable
(Per camp) Ast Directors
12:45 – 13:15
Nurse’s office and medicines – practical
Per Camp, Nurse + Ast Directors
Nurse Observations training
(Returnee welfare/ Assistant Director)
13:15 – 14:00
13.15-14.00
Welfare Coordinators per Camp, per age
group
As in staff timetable
Would the welfares help in these sessions?
14:00
CAMP PHOTO
15.00
Lunch
16.00 – 17:00
Kitchen Procedures
(Ass Dir)
LAST QUERIES
(Ass Dir)
FINAL ADMIN AND PREP
* Ast Directors meet with the nurses and
take to the session for intros
16.00
TOUR and talk through CAMP Procedures
in Camps
(All)
Medical Procedures Per Camp
(Nurses and Welfares, split per camp and
explanations)
Intros to the nurse AC and FC
16.00 – 17:00
17:00 – 17:30
17:30 – 19:30
16:00 – 20:30
20:30 – 21:00
18:30 – 19:30
BREAK
17:00 – 18:00
INTRODUCTION TO NURSE
Timetable (Ast. Dir)
Basic Tour + explanation of Medical
Procedures and meeting (FC + AC
Welfare Coord)
18:00 – 19:00
Procedures and daily timetable, tick lists
(Ast Directors, per camp??)
19:00 – 20:00
Nurse Training Observations and paper
work
(Assistant Director)
19.30
NURSE SET UP
Returnee Welfare
Medicines and Office area for FC
Understanding the division for camps etc
17:00 – 19:00
On Duty
Guard: 22:00
– 02:00
On Call Driver
for late staff
pick ups
17:00–19:30
19.30-21.00
20:00 – 21:00
Welfare Coord and Assistant Welfare
Coords with camps
Initiative games –
(Returnne Coordinators)
Park
21:00
22.30
16:00–17:00
Dinner
LITTLE VILLAGE AND ADVENTURE : MEET WITH
CAMP STAFF TO GO FOR A DRINK – TEX MEX
FAMILY + SPORTS: CAMP QUIZ IN BAR
JIMENA (AST COORD)
FC Matthew G
Self Familarisation
Ast welfare Coords
Roles within camp
(Welfare Coords) for the Ast Welfare
Coords
20:30 – 21:00
Queries
(Ast Director/ Welfares )
Dinner
FAMILY + SPORTS: MEET WITH CAMP STAFF TO
GO FOR A DRINK – TEX MEX
On Duty
Guard: 22:00 –
02:00
FC Russell
CREW MEMBERS TRAINING
Telephone supervision
Meal times
(AC Camp serving the food)
(Welfare Coords per camp)
LV – Xisela
FC – Sandra + Guille
AC- Josefina
Welfare Coords
Prep for training
sessions
19:00 – 20:30
21.00
22.30
NURSE continuation with set up
LAST QUERIES AND CHECKS
(Ass Dir)
CREW MEMBERS TRAINING
(Camp Director)
Timetable and Procedures
LV + FC – Stephen
AC - Jason
CREW MEMBER TRAINING
Having a leader group
Daily Routine and timetable
(Ast Coordinators per camp)
LV + FC - Gemma
AC - Jack
LITTLE VILLAGE + ADVENTURE CAMP
QUIZ IN BAR JIMENA (AST COORD)
FC Russell
FC Matthew G
21.00
22.30
On Duty Guard:
22:00 – 02:00
Dinner
DRINKS PER AGE GROUP (MEET AGE
GROUP COORDINATORS)
VENUE SET BY COORDINATORS
FC Matthew G
FC Russell
Nurse arrival Wednesday 10:00 – 12:00 Crew Member arrival Thursday 10:00 – 14:00
General Meeting
Camp Support
Crew Members
Nurse
Ast/ Welfare
Coordinators
TECS
- Camp Manual 20
English Summer Camp
Pre Training Session Reading
The training week is an intense week where you will be adjusting many different
factors, living on a camp in Spain, meeting new people and of course a lot of
information will be being thrown at you. In order that this doesn’t come too over
bearing and that the training week is as productive as possible it is essential prior to
each session you familiarise yourself with the area by doing the background reading
indicated below for each session.
NOTE For individual sessions refer to the set reading material noted below.
Tuesday
1. All: Introductions and Objectives of Training Week
•
•
•
Chapter 1 – Training Weeks
Chapter 2 – Introduction to TECS and Camp
Chapter 3 – Camp Structure
2.1 Monitors: Communication and Foreign Language Session
•
Chapter 6 – Communicating with Foreign Language Children
2.2 Teachers: Teaching on Summer Camp; Class Structure and A Good Teacher
•
TEACHERS RESOURCE MANUAL: SUMMER CAMP TEACHER INFORMATION.
3. All: Tour, Camp Procedures and Daily Timetable
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 4 – Daily Programmes
Chapter 6 – Daily Responsibilities of Monitors and Teachers
Chapter 7 – Camp Rules
Chapter 8 – Camp Procedures
Chapter 9 – Understanding the Different Groups on Camp
Wednesday
1. All: Colour War
•
Chapter 10 – Colour War
2. Monitors:
•
How to give a Good Sports Session
Sports section of Chapter 4 – Daily Programmes
3. All: Welfare and Discipline
•
Chapter 7 – Camp Rules
4.1 Monitors:
Arts and Crafts / Projects
TECS - Camp Manual 21
English Summer Camp
•
•
Arts and Crafts and Project section of Chapter 4 – Daily Programmes
Arts and Crafts Manual (Separate Manual in Arts and Crafts Room and in
Staff Room)
4.2 Teachers: How to plan a good evening ent and excursion class.
•
•
Teachers Manual – Session 2.
Evening Entertainment Manual – Notes for Teachers
Thursday
1. All: Demands of the Job, Morale and Problems
•
Chapter 11 – Team Spirit, Morale and Working Together
2. Teachers: How to plan a good project class and info on set projects.
•
Teachers Resource Manual – Session 3
2. All: First Aid
•
Chapter 15 – Camp Medical Procedure
3. All: Evening Entertainments
•
•
Evening Entertainment section of Chapter 4 – Daily Programmes
Evening Entertainment Manual (a copy can be found in the staff room.)
Friday
1. All: Excursions and Control of Sophomores on Excursions
•
Chapter 13 – Excursions
2. All: Putting to Bed and Getting Up
•
Getting Up and Putting to Bed sections of Chapter 4 – Daily Programmes
Saturday
1. All: Arrivals
•
Chapter 12 - Arrivals
TECS - Camp Manual 22
English Summer Camp
Chapter 3: Introduction to TECS and Camp
What is TECS? Who Exactly am I Working For?
TECS1 was established in 1997 and since then has enjoyed a rapid period of
expansion and now offers both children and adults a wide range of opportunities to
develop their language skills. TECS grew out of its sister organisation El Centro
Ingles. El Centro Ingles was established in 1967 as a nursery for parents who wished
their children to be exposed to English and now is a bi-lingual school for over 800
children.
The premises on which the camp in El Puerto is based are those used as the bilingual school during the academic year.
TECS now consists of four components as follows:
TECS Language
Programs
Academy
Homestay
400
students;
adults,
business and children
Groups of school children
who come to learn Spanish
and stay with local families
Language Travels
Students who travel
overseas to learn English
Summer Camps
Camps in El Puerto de
Santa Maria, Sotogrande,
Sancti Petri, Alcala de los
Gazules and Grazalema.
The Camps: Family Camp, Star Camp, GO Camp, Sports Camp, Magic Village,
and Little Village
We have increased the number of camps that we are operating this year to 6 in total;
Family Camp de Santa Maria, Star Camp in Sotogrande, Little Village in Grazalema,
Sport Camp in Sancti Petri, Go Camp in Alcala de los Gazules, and Magic Village in
Benaocaz. The first summer camp opened in El Puerto in 1998 with 30 campers and
since then growth has been rapid and this year between the four camps we are
expecting almost 1800 campers to pass through our gates.
As a staff member you are assigned to work on a set camp2. Whilst largely speaking
the programs offered on each camp are similar, the camps undoubtedly have their
own charm. All camps have specific theme names, El Puerto or Family Camp, due
to the wide variety of ages that we accommodate, so brother and sisters of all ages
1
2
For those interested TECS stands for The English Consortium Spain.
Though for logistical reasons you may be required to move between the Camps.
TECS - Camp Manual 23
English Summer Camp
can come to the same camp, is based in a busy summer town. Sport Camp, in
Sancti Petri, the most typical setting of a summer camp, is based in large facilities
close to a coastal town. Star Camp has a feel of a bit of independence being set in a
hotel. Magic Village and Go Camp set in the mountains makes room for the natural
approach to English learning. Last but not least is Grazalema or Little Village which
is in a mountainous region of Cadiz and it differs greatly from the other camps as the
campers are of the older age range and have a little more freedom and learn through
a Total English programme (see academic notes on this programme later in manual).
Staff in Family Camp benefit from the on hand support of our central office and the
fact that the camp is run out of our sister organisation, El Centro Ingles´ facilities
(during the summer we have exclusive use of the installations.) Sports Camp, Star
Camp, Magic Village, Go Camp and Little Village camps differ from Family Camp in
the sense that the facilities are rented for the course of the summer and as such at
times we have less independence and hence staff must come armed with a sense of
flexibility as not everything is always completely within our control.
This table sets out in basic form some of the key differences between the six different
camps. Take particular note of the different age groups and the length of the camps.
TECS - Camp Manual 24
English Summer Camp
Camp
Started:
Premises
Family Camp
Sports Camp
Star Camp
Little Village Camp
Magic Village
1998
2004
2009
2008
2009
2010
Run out of premises of sister
company El Centro Ingles. In
the year the premises are a
bi-lingual school for 800
children. The school is based
in the coastal town of El
Puerto 15 minutes walk from
the beach
Premises are rented during
the summer and shared with
other organisations (we have
defined areas). Surrounded
by countryside giving a more
spacious feel. 40 mins walk
to beach
Ran in an NH Hotel in
Sotogrande. This is a
temporary location close to
the beach, town, and the
extra activities.
Located in Grazalema, a
small village in the Sierra of
Cadiz. It is a close walk to
the nearby town.
Located in the mountains
of Cadiz, within walking
distance of a small town
Located in a remote area of
the Cadiz mountains.
th
Dates
Campers
Ages
Accommodation
Facilities
Extra
Activities
th
Camp 1: July 4 - 17
th
st
Camp 2: July 18 - 31
st
th
Camp 3: Aug. 1 -14
th
th
Camp 4: Aug. 15 - 28
Three Age Groups
Sophomores: c. 6-10
Juniors: c. 10 – 13
Seniors: c. 13 – 17
Children choose between
staying in residence (rooms
of c. 6-10 campers) or in
tents on a small campsite
attached, and exclusive, to
the school.
•
Swimming Pool
•
Indoor Gymnasium
•
Basketball Courts /
Football Pitches
•
Computer Room with
Internet Access
•
Vending machine for
drinks / snacks
•
Staff room
•
Public telephones
Campers have option of
following sports:
•
Sailing
•
Horse Riding
•
Padel
th
th
th
th
th
th
th
Go Camp
th
th
th
Camp 1: July 4 - 17
th
st
Camp 2: July 18 - 31
Camp 1: July 4 - 17
th
st
Camp 2: July 18 - 31
Camp 1: July 4 - 17
th
st
Camp 2: July 18 - 31
Camp 1: July 4 - 17
th
st
Camp 2: July 18 - 31
Camp 1: July 4 - 17
th
st
Camp 2: July 18 - 31
Two Age Groups
Juniors: c. 10 -12
Senior: c. 12-14
One Age Group
Seniors: c. 14-17
One Age Group
Anglos c. 13-16
One Age Group
Juniors c. 10-13
One Age Group
Pioneers c. 9-11
All children stay in residence
with room size ranging from 2
to 8 campers.
Children stay in groups of
three in designated hotel
rooms.
Children stay in cabins in
small groups on the camp
grounds.
Children stay in ´huts´ in
small groups on the camp
grounds.
Children stay in residences
in small groups on the
camp grounds.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Large Swimming Pool
No internet access
Tennis Courts /
Basketball Courts
•
Football Pitches
•
Volleyball Courts
•
Theatre for Performances
•
Vending Machines for
Drinks/ Snacks
•
Wide open spaces
•
Public telephones
Campers have option of
following sports:
•
Water sports
•
Golf
Swimming Pool
WiFi Internet Access in
rooms (pay by staff)
Campers have option of
following sports:
•
Water sports
•
Horse Riding
•
Tennis/ Padel
Swimming Pool
On site shop
No extra activities for
campers.
Swimming Pool
No extra activities for
campers.
Swimming Pool
Adventure sports
No extra activities for
campers.
TECS - Camp Manual 25
English Summer Camp
How do the facilities differ for teachers on each camp?
All teachers benefit from the following:
• Level specific resource packs which provide the backbone of their lessons.
• Access to CD players.
• Classrooms equipped with blackboards or whiteboards.
• Support from an experienced age group TEFL coordinator.
• Daily Age Group teacher meetings with ample opportunity for resource
sharing.
In addition teachers should be aware of some of the differences / challenges in
teaching on each camp.
Family Camp
Family Camp with its computer room gives teachers access to internet based TEFL
resources. A photocopier is at the disposal of teachers, whilst there is also the
potential to plan constructive video based lessons.
Classrooms are modern and air-conditioned.
Space is more restricted at this camp, and as such the potential for outdoor teaching.
Sport Camp
As the property is not owned by TECS, Sport Camp teachers won’t have access to
the internet, and limited access to a photocopier available.
The grounds are quite vast on Sports Camp to be able to take campers outside for
certain class sessions.
Star Camp
Star Camp, set in a hotel, has the most dynamic of teaching environments. There is
a hall which will be divided into different indoor classrooms. There are also spaces
around the hotel grounds to conduct outdoor classes. The availability of these
spaces may change on a daily basis.
There is WiFi internet access in the hotel at Star Camp, however there is not a
computer lab as in Family Camp. In addition at Star Camp, as the property is not
owned by TECS, unlike in Family Camp, there is limited access to printers and
photocopiers.
Little Village
It is a very rural camp with its own natural beauty. Half of the class will take place in
wood cabins fully furnished with all the necessary equipment and the other half
outside the classroom in nature with teachers being encouraged to make use of the
natural environment round about the camp.
Classes will be without paper and have no direct grammar themes and instead be
conversational based classes. For lesson planning teachers will have access to a
computer and a photocopier but won’t have internet access.
TECS - Camp Manual 26
English Summer Camp
Magic Village
As the property is not owned by TECS, Sport Camp teachers won’t have access to
the internet, and limited access to a photocopier available that is shared with
management.
There are outdoor picnic tables to conduct outdoor sessions. Teachers will have
limited access to AV equipment for media sessions. Teachers should bring music,
video, etc files with them TO camp as they will not have access to internet to
download such materials.
Go Camp
As the property is not owned by TECS, Sport Camp teachers won’t have access to
the internet, and limited access to a photocopier available that is shared with
management. There is a hall which will be divided into different indoor classrooms.
Teachers may also take students outside for games, etc.
Who are the Campers? What are they like?
Between our camps we have campers ranging from 6 – 17 years old. There is a mix
of returnees (kids who have been to one of our camps before) and new kids coming
for the first time. Their English level ranges from absolute beginners to kids with
whom you can have fairly advanced conversations. However the average level,
especially amongst the Sophomores and Juniors is low and staff have to use
excellent communication skills to communicate with them at all times.
Most come from reasonably wealthy backgrounds and as such bring with them
certain expectations of how things should be done and at times a degree of
selfishness that comes from being used to getting what they want. In general all the
kids are Spanish with majority of the campers come from Andalusia though a
proportion will be from the Madrid area. Occasionally some kids will come from Latin
America and most will have Spanish as their first language.
In general behavioural problems are minor with Spanish kids having a generally
positive and welcoming attitude.
Spanish culture remains very family orientated and as such the experience of being
away from home for the children, in addition to the alien English speaking
environment, means that for many adapting to camp life can be tough, adding to our
responsibilities on a pastoral care level.
On camp each Age Group has its particular charm and of course potential
challenges. The Sophomores some of the younger Juniors will see you as surrogate
parents. They will struggle to communicate with you but have a keenness to learn
and almost unquestioning respect for you. Of course given their age they need
round the clock attention and supervision.
The Juniors might in many ways be considered the ideal age for camp. They are
generally highly motivated and keen to participate in all the games and activities.
However at times a little teenage angst is starting to kick in and clearly their English
level is generally lower than the Seniors. Like with the Sophomores, homesickness
can be a problem.
TECS - Camp Manual 27
English Summer Camp
The Seniors given their English level are the easiest to communicate with and get to
know. Some will be really interested in finding out about you and where you come
from, though others may give off the whole “too cool for school” type of vibe. For
them though camp is a great experience as they work their way through relationship
after relationship!
How long do the campers stay on camp?
Essentially the camp works on a 2 week cycle and most campers come for 2 weeks.
However some do stay for 4 weeks (known as “4 weekers).
TECS - Camp Manual 28
English Summer Camp
Chapter 4: Camp Structure
At camp we all work together in order to create the synergy that makes for a
successful and enjoyable summer for staff and campers alike. We are all part of one
team, pulling in the same direction (it isn’t an “us and them” type of world!!); therefore
it is useful to be aware of some of the key responsibilities of the different staff who
work on camp.
Year Round Camp Central Office Staff
TECS General Manager
David Randell
David is the TECS General Manager and responsible overall for all the programmes
that TECS offers.
These programmes include academy, language travel and
homestay as well as summer camp which is the largest part of TECS.
Director of Language Camps
Douglas Haines
Douglas is directly responsible for the Language Camps operated by TECS. During
the summer he will spend a lot of his time working between the four camps, offering a
support base for the Camp Directors and the Administrative Staff in the Central Office
in Family Camp.
He is assisted by the Camp Secretary who is based in Family Camp.
Ast. Director of Language Camps
Gill Thompson
Gill is responsible for the Language Travel and Homestay programs. She also
manages the suppliers, materials and transfers for the summer camps. She is part of
the Central Office team, offering support to all of the four camps.
Welfare and Parental Communication Director
Jesús Dávila
Jesús oversees the public attention and welfare programmes on camp, meaning he
works closely with Ast Directors. Jesús manages the “incidencias and attends to any
calls on the emergency LT and Camp mobile.
Camp Management Personnel
The following members of the Management Team are employed specifically for the
summer, though some do work with us in different capacities during the year.
Camp Director
The Camp Site Director oversees the Activity and English programmes on camp.
They also have further responsibility for co-ordinating all aspects of the programme
from maintenance to the kitchen and this can mean that they spend a lot of their time
in the office. Other than on Arrivals, Departures and Excursions they have little direct
contact with staff members and rather are primarily responsible for managing the
TECS - Camp Manual 29
English Summer Camp
Coordinators. So please remember just because you can’t see them all the time
doesn’t mean that they aren’t working incredibly hard!!
Assistant Director
The Assistant Director has direct responsibility for both staff and camper welfare.
They are bi-lingual in English and Spanish and spend a lot of time communicating
with parents and dealing with parental problems behind the scenes.
They also produce all the listings on camp and manage the Welfare Coordinators
and Camp Drivers.
Activity Co-ordinators and TEFL Co-ordinators
Each Age Group on camp is jointly managed by a TEFL Co-ordinator and an Activity
Co-ordinator. They have direct management responsibilities for all the staff in their
Age Group and as a staff member they should be your main port of call, regarding
any problems or queries you might have.
The Activity Co-ordinator oversees the running of the Age Group programme (i.e.
Arts and Crafts, Sports and Evening Entertainments).
The TEFL Co-ordinator as well as teaching 4 days out of 5 is responsible for
overseeing the TEFL programme in their Age Group. Both Co-ordinators have
responsibilities with regard to supervising night watch duties and running their Age
Group whilst on weekend excursions.
Assistant Co-ordinators
There is an Assistant Co-ordinator for each Age Group. As well as having all the
responsibilities of a Camp Monitor this person acts as a support for the Activity and
TEFL Co-ordinator and will cover for them in certain situations. Given their
experience of camp life they are an excellent support base for new staff.
Welfare Coordinator
Each Age Group has a Welfare Coordinator. This person is Spanish and will have a
high level of English. They have a role in managing the level of welfare care in their
Age Group and in doing this they will offer a support base for Monitors and Teachers
in dealing with welfare related issues. Whilst responsibility primarily falls on Monitors
and Teachers as a first port of call, the Welfare Coordinator, with their command of
Spanish and understanding of Spanish culture, acts as an important support base.
Where need be, they will communicate with parents.
Specialist Coordinator
There is one Specialist Coordinator per camp that ensures the arts and crafts
programme is run to the highest quality in all areas. They also make sure the upkeep
of both the sports and art and crafts material cupboards is to standard. The
Specialist Coordinator manages the extra activity specialists in the carrying out of
their specialist responsibilities, done in coordination with the Ast. Director. They also
work alongside other management staff in ensuring the success of all parts of daily
life on camp.
TECS - Camp Manual 30
English Summer Camp
Camp Staff
Teachers
On camp teachers have responsibilities both inside the classroom in respect of
teaching TEFL classes, but also importantly outside the classroom with regard to the
pastoral care of the children. As well as teaching between 3 and 4 hours TEFL each
day, they have responsibilities for Arts and Crafts / Project classes, supervising
children at meal times and participating in Evening Entertainment. At camp a teacher
is much more than just a TEFL instructor.
Monitors
Monitors with Teachers share the pastoral car of children at camp. They also teach
Arts and Craft and Sports classes and take part in Evening Entertainments. With
teachers they supervise children during meal times.
Assistant Monitors
Assistant Monitors help Monitors in the performance of their duties. The activities
they undertake are similar to those of a Monitor.
Specialist Monitors: Arts and Crafts, Adventure, Tennis Music and Dance and Nurse
Monitor, etc.
Specialist monitors have all the responsibilities of a normal monitor however during
the Sports Session segment of the day; they take responsibility for their speciality.
The Arts and Crafts specialist oversees the running of the Arts and Crafts
programme and acts as a sounding board for Monitors and Teachers with regard to
ideas to use in class. During Sports sessions they are responsible for making
samples and organising resources.
The Adventure Specialist takes groups of classes on a rota basis from all Age
Groups for Abseiling, Rock Climbing and Archery.
The Music Specialist, who works only in Family Camp, as well as having
responsibility for the Senior Dance Project, runs the Music Group of non-multi activity
children during the sports sessions. In August they will run the Starlight program.
The Nurse Monitor covers for the Camp Nurse when they are off duty.
Crew Members (former campers, 16-18 years old)
Crew Members are all former campers and as such are Spanish. They however
must speak English to the children at all times. They act as waiters/waitresses at
meal times and also assist Sophomore or Junior monitors and teachers with some of
their responsibilities. At times they assist with some welfare duties.
TECS - Camp Manual 31
English Summer Camp
Camp Support
Camp Support have responsibility for running camp related errands. During sports
sessions they drive some of the non-multi activity children to their different sports.
On a rota basis they are on call in respect of emergencies. They are especially busy
during arrivals and departures picking up and dropping off campers.
IT Specialist
The IT specialist as the camp photographer is responsible for updating the TECS
website. They also act as the Assistant Editor of the Camp Magazine and are
responsible for making the Camp Film. They collate and display all points related to
Colour War.
Camp Nurse
The Camp Nurse oversees the medical care of children on camp and works closely
with the Welfare Coordinators in this respect. When off duty they are covered by the
Nurse Monitor.
Spanish Camp Support Staff
The Camp Support team are responsible for the maintenance and upkeep of the site.
At times they also perform some Monitor duties. They are a mix of Spanish and
English speaking staff.
In Family Camp there is a team of Spanish maintenance staff who upkeep the site
and act as Guards at night.
Cleaning, Laundry and Kitchen Staff
These roles are filled by Spanish people working for companies contracted by TECS.
Who’s Who of Camp 2010?
Getting to know all the different staff at camp is difficult and just as you manage that
all the kids will arrive and you will have to remember all their names!
The diagrams and tables on the following pages are designed to give you a better
idea of who is who on camp and together with the descriptions above will help you to
understand who is who and what to do they do on camp!
TECS - Camp Manual 32
English Summer Camp
Family Camp (El Puerto)
TECS General
Manager
Camp
Secretary
(central ofiice)
Ast. Director
of Language
Camps
Welfare and
Parental
Communication
Central Manager
Camp Site
Director
Specialist
Coordinator
• Sophomore (6-10) apx
60
• Junior (10-13) apx 80
• Senior (13-17) apx 60
Director of
Language
Camps
PROGRAMMING
ACTIVITY
Family Camp Age Groups
PARENTAL
COMMUNICATION
Assistant
Director
TEFL + some Activity
Activity
Coordinator x3
TEFL
Coordinator x3
(1 Head Act Coord)
(1 Head TEFL Coord)
Specialist
Coordinator
EXTRA ACTIVITIES
Assistant
Coordinator
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
IT Specialist
Teachers
Crew
Members
CAMP ADMIN
Camp
Drivers
Black: Central Office Management
Navy Blue: Upper Camp Management
Blue: Mid management programme.
Red: Normal Camp Staff
Green: Camp Support Staff
Yellow: Welfare (mid management welfare) and
Nurse
Light Blue: Admin Staff
Purple: Contracted Suppliers
LINE unbroken with arrow: indicates main manager
Broken LINE: manager at certain points
Red Broken Line: work together, although one
above is more senior.
SUPPLIERS
Welfare
Coordinator
TEFL + ACT
Coordinator
(1 Head Wel)
(extra activities +
kitchen + clearing)
CAMP
SITE
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
WELFARE
and HEALTH
Nurse and
Nurse Mon
Teachers and
TEFL Monitor.
Crew
Members
TECS - Camp Manual 33
Little Village
English Summer Camp
TECS General
Manager
Little Village (Grazalema)
• Campers 12/13-16 all
in same group- no age
group name, know as
“Anglos”. 58-65
students.
Specifics to this Camp
Camp
Secretary
(central ofiice)
PROGRAMMING
Camp Site
Director
CAMP ADMIN
ACTIVITY
TEFL + some Activity
Activity
Coordinator x1
TEFL
Coordinator x1
Director of
Language
Camps
Ast. Director
of Language
Camps
Welfare and
Parental
Communication
Central Manager
CAMP
SITE
SUPPLIERS
(extra activities +
kitchen + clearing)
WELFARE
and HEALTH
Camp Driver
And Support
Nurse Mon
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
Teachers
Crew
Member
POSITIONS NOT IN THIS CAMP: AST
DIRECTOR, WELFARE COORD AND NURSE.
PARENTAL
COMMUNICATION
- Welfare and discipline role is filled by TEFL and ACT
COORD jointly from looking after camper perspective.
- Diet supervision is done by Act Coord.
- Camp Director oversees and updates camper
observaciones and manages welfare situations are dealt
with well.
- Parental Communication Role: the emergency phone
is manned by the MV Ast Director but they only answer
the phone and register the ob and warn Camp Director
who manages dealing with the situation. Speaking to
parent is done by Camp Director if can be done in
English or by responsible Spanish speaking staff
member or by Welfare and Parental Comm. Director
(Jesús) when a very important issue.
- Nurse Role is fulfilled by Nurse Monitor who is
managed by Camp Director and at times TEFL Coord
when covering for Director and also MV Nurse may visit
every so often.
- The Act Coord has a very important role in controlling
English.
The TEFL Coord leads one of the weekend excursions
Black: Central Office Management
Navy Blue: Upper Camp Management
Blue: Mid management programme.
Red: Normal Camp Staff
Green: Camp Support Staff
Yellow: Welfare (mid management welfare) and
Nurse
Beige: Specialist Coordinator
Light Blue: Admin Staff
Purple: Contracted Suppliers
LINE unbroken with arrow: indicates main manager
Broken LINE: manager at certain points
TECS
Camp
Manual
although 34
one
Red Broken
Line:-work
together,
English Summer Camp
Specifics to this Camp
POSITIONS NOT IN THIS CAMP: WELFARE
COORD AND NURSE.
Sport Camp (Campano Sancti Petri)
TECS General
Manager
Sports Camp Age Groups
11-16: Two age groups:
Juniors and Seniors.
Camp
Secretary
(central ofiice)
PROGRAMMING
Camp Site
Director
ACTIVITY
Director of
Language
Camps
Ast. Director
of Language
Camps
Welfare and
Parental
Communication
Central Manager
PARENTAL
COMMUNICATION
CAMP ADMIN
Assistant
Director
TEFL + some Activity
TEFL + ACT
Coordinator
TEFL
Coordinator x1
Activity
Coordinator x1
EXTRA ACTIVITIES
Camp Drivers and
Support x1
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
- All welfare coord role is fulfilled by Ast Director but both
TEFL and Act must be very involved in welfare,
- Diet supervision is done by Ast Director.
- The Nurse role is fulfilled by Nurse Monitor with the Ast
director managing them and supporting as needed.
- The TEFL Coord manages all teachers for both age
groups.
- The Act Coord manages all monitors for both age
groups, although the Ast Coord will lead parts of one of
the age groups at points of day when needed, even. Ents
for example.
Teachers
Crew
Members
Black: Central Office Management
Navy Blue: Upper Camp Management
Blue: Mid management programme.
Red: Normal Camp Staff
Green: Camp Support Staff
Yellow: Welfare (mid management welfare) and Nurse
Beige: Specialist Coordinator
Light Blue: Admin Staff
Purple: Contracted Suppliers
LINE unbroken with arrow: indicates main manager
Broken LINE: manager at certain points
Red Broken Line: work together, although one above is
more senior.
SUPPLIER
S
(extra activities +
kitchen + clearing)
CAMP
SITE
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
Nurse Mon
WELFARE
and HEALTH
Teachers and
TEFL Monitor.
Crew
Members
TECS - Camp Manual 35
English Summer Camp
TECS General
Manager
Star Camp (Sotogrande)
Star Camp
13/14-17: all in the Senior
Age Group. 55 students.
Camp
Secretary
(central ofiice)
Director of
Language
Camps
Ast. Director
of Language
Camps
Welfare and
Parental
Communication
Central Manager
PROGRAMMING
CAMP ADMIN
ACTIVITY
Activity
Coordinator
Specifics to this Camp
Camp Site
Director
TEFL
Camp
Drivers
And Support
Nurse Mon
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
Teachers
PARENTAL
COMM
CAMP
SITE
SUPPLIER
S
(extra activities +
kitchen + clearing)
Black: Central Office Management
Navy Blue: Upper Camp Management
Blue: Mid management programme.
Red: Normal Camp Staff
Green: Camp Support Staff
Yellow: Welfare (mid management welfare) and
Nurse
Beige: Specialist Coordinator
Light Blue: Admin Staff
Purple: Contracted Suppliers
LINE unbroken with arrow: indicates main manager
Broken LINE: manager at certain points
Red Broken Line: work together, although one
POSITIONS NOT IN THIS CAMP: AST
DIRECTOR, TEFL COORD, WELFARE COORD
AND NURSE.
- Welfare and discipline role is filled by ACT COORD
from looking after camper perspective.
- Diet supervision is done by Nurse Monitor with Director
overseeing it.
- Camp Director oversees and updates camper
observaciones and manages welfare situations are dealt
with well.
- Parental Communication Role is fulfilled by Camp
Director.
- The Act Coord leads one of the weekend excursions
and covers for the Director in all roles when they are off.
- The Nurse role is fulfilled by Nurse Monitor with the
director managing them.
- Diagnosing: is dealt with by local medical centres or
TECS - Camp Manual 36
English Summer Camp
Magic Village (Benaocaz)
Camp
Secretary
(central ofiice)
Magic Village Age Groups
10-13: all campers in
Junior age group by
Houses. Two “groups” per
house 10-12 and 1213/14. 90students in 3
houses.
PROGRAMMING
Camp Site
Director
ACTIVITY
Specifics to this Camp
TECS General
Manager
POSITIONS NOT IN THIS CAMP: WELFARE
COORD.
Director of
Language
Camps
Ast. Director
of Language
Camps
Welfare and
Parental
Communication
Central Manager
PARENTAL
COMMUNICATION
TEFL + ACT
Coordinator
TEFL
Coordinator x1
EXTRA ACTIVITIES
Assistant
Coordinator
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
CAMP ADMIN
Nurse/Welfare
for AC + LV
TEFL + some Activity
Activity
Coordinator x1
- Welfare Coord role fulfilled by mix of Ast Wel Coordmainly the contact with kids, Nurse (for parental comm..)
and Ast Director being more active in Welfare.
- Diet supervision is done by Nurse.
- Ast Director oversees and updates ALL camper
observaciones.
- See notes in LV position diagram for assistance
provided by Ast Dir and Nurse to LV.
Camp
Drivers and
Support
Teachers
Crew
Members
Black: Central Office Management
Navy Blue: Upper Camp Management
Blue: Mid management programme.
Red: Normal Camp Staff
Green: Camp Support Staff
Yellow: Welfare (mid management welfare) and
Nurse
Beige: Specialist Coordinator
Light Blue: Admin Staff
Purple: Contracted Suppliers
LINE unbroken with arrow: indicates main manager
Broken LINE: manager at certain points
Red Broken Line: work together, although one
SUPPLIER
S
(extra activities +
kitchen + clearing)
CAMP
SITE
Monitors
and Ass.
Monitors
WELFARE
and HEALTH
Ast Wel Coord
Teachers and
TEFL Monitor.
Crew
Members
TECS - Camp Manual 37
English Summer Camp
TECS General
Manager
Go Camp (El Barriche)
Camp
Secretary
(central ofiice)
Go Camp
8/9-11/19: Pioneers with a
mixture of Imm. English
soph and Jun packs.
Around 90 campers.
Director of
Language
Camps
Ast. Director
of Language
Camps
Welfare and
Parental
Communication
Central Manager
Camp Site
Director
PROGRAMMING
CAMP ADMIN
TEFL
Activity
Coordinator
Nurse and
Welfare
Coord
-
Spanish
Monitors
SUPPLIER
S
Camp
Drivers
And Support
Teachers
Crew
Members
CAMP
SITE
POSITIONS NOT IN THIS CAMP: AST
DIRECTOR, TEFL COORD, WELFARE
COORD.
-
ACTIVITY
WELFARE +
PARENTAL COMM.
PARENTAL
COMMUNICATION
(extra activities +
kitchen + clearing)
Black: Central Office Management
Navy Blue: Upper Camp Management
Blue: Mid management programme.
Red: Normal Camp Staff
Green: Camp Support Staff
Yellow: Welfare (mid management welfare) and
Nurse
Beige: Specialist Coordinator
Light Blue: Admin Staff
Purple: Contracted Suppliers
LINE unbroken with arrow: indicates main manager
Broken LINE: manager at certain points
Red Broken Line: work together, although one
Specifics to this Camp
-
-
-
GO Nurse also fulfils ALL the roles of
welfare coord.
Act Coord: helps with TEFL as needed.
Resp of English control.
Diet supervision is done by Nurse.
Camp Director oversees and updates
camper observaciones and manages
welfare situations are dealt with well.
Parental Communication Role: is
done from management level by
Camp Director and on midmanagement level by Nurse/Welfare
Coord.
Nurse Coord cover emergency phone
when Director off.
The Act Coord leads the weekend
excursions.
Monitors will also serve food during
meal times.
TECS - Camp Manual 38
English Summer Camp
Staff Assignments
KEY TO POSITIONS:
AC = Assistant Co-ordinator
MUS = Music and Dance Specialist
A&C = Arts and Crafts Specialist
CM = Crew Member
M= Male
T= Tennis Specialist
WM=Welfare Monitor
NM = Nurse Monitor
ADV = Adventure Specialist
TM = TEFL Monitor
TC= TEFL Coordinator
Numbers = weeks working
ADM=Admin Specialist
R= Returnee
M = Monitor
HR= Horse Riding Specialist
SR= Sailing Specialist
T= Teacher
WSR= Water Sports Spec
LG= Life Guard
H.C= Head Coordinator
SC= Super Cool Specialist
GOL= Golf Specialist
AST= Ast Monitor
F = Female
s.GOL. Super golf
ES= English Specialist
P= Padel
Family Camp
Management and Admin and Support Staff
Management
POS
Admin+Support
POS
Name
Camp Dir.
Ast. Dir.
Act Coord
TEFL Coord
Liz Grabo (R)
Guillermo Moreno (R)
Scott Torrance
Muireanne Egan (R)/ Kylie
Watson (HC) (R)
Henry del Toro(R)/Myriam
Gomes (R)
Nick Herlihy/ (R)/Ali
Coleman (R)
Phil Turner (R)
Wel Coord
Act Coord
TEFL Coord
F
M
M
F/F
Soph
Soph
8
8
8
8
M/F Soph
4/4
M/F
Jun
4/4
M
Jun
8
Wel Coord
David Navarro (R)
M
Jun
8
Act Coord
Sam Swann (HC) (R)
M
Sen
8
TEFL Coord
F/F
Sen
4/4
Wel Coord
Kylie Watson (HC) (R) /
Rachel Hugstad (R)
Lucia Santiago
F
Sen
8
Ast. Wel Coord
Silvia Cubero(R)
F
Name
Driver
Driver
IT Spec
Nurse
Matthew Gittings
Russell Sylvester
William McNaughty
Maria Alarcia Garcia
M
M
M
F
8
8
8
8
8
Teachers Family Camp
Sophomores
LEV
Juniors
LEV
Teachers
Seniors
LEV
Teachers
0
1
2
3
James Swain
Michelle Gurner
Ben Crompton
Joy Venner/ x
M
F
M
F
T
T
T
T
6
6
8
4/4
11+
2*
2*
Keara Kennedy
Slaven Ungar
Kaylea Russel
Samuel Hemingway/ x
F
M
F
M
T
T
T
T
4
Muireanne Egan (R)/
Kylie Watson (HC) (R)
F
TC
8
3
Colin Pollock
M
4
Ruth-Anna Farragher
(R)
Phil Turner (R)
5
1
2
3
4
T
8
6
6
4/
4
6
F
T
6
6FCE
M
TC
8
F
M
T
T
M
T
Teachers
Kylie Watson (R)/ x
Stuart Mac (R)
Rachel Hugstad (R)
Gerald Thompson (R)
/Inge Hol (R)
Alan Dolan
F
M
F
M/F
TC/T
T
T/TC
T
4/4
8
8
4/4
M
T
6
Juliet Becerra/ Jason
Ihle
M
T
4/4
4
4
Inge Hol (R)
Alex Mac (R)
F
M
T
T
4
4
4
Jason Ihle (R)
5
August Teachers
Emma Leigh (R)
Daniel Bath (R)
TECS - Camp Manual 39
English Summer Camp
Monitors Family Camp
Sophomores
Juniors
Seniors
Monitor
1
2
3
Elaine Smith (R)
Jamie Clark
Mary Behan (R)/
Tristina
Darren Monahan
Emma McCarron
Alysia Topping (R)
4
5
6
F
M
F
AC
TM
NM
8
8
8
1
2
3
Patrick Alvarez (R)
Rachel Finnis (R)
Lachlan Hall
M
F
M
AC
M
LG
8
8
8
1
2
3
M
F
F
M
MUS
M
6
8
8
4
5
6
F
F
F
M
HR
M
6
4
4
4
5
6
7
Anita Hurst
Louise Gorman
Kristie McArdle
(changed to Soph for
now)
Niall O´Connor
M
P
8
7
8
Joanna Moran
F
TM
8
9
Sean Herlihy
M
BB
8
7
Edward Boules
Gemma Skelton (R)
Jane Hedigan/
Michelle Maher
Steven Byrne
David Doyle
Liz Tunney
M
F
F
AC
M
ADM
8
8
4/4
M
M
F
M
TM
M
6
8
4
F
SR
4/4
8
Sarah O´Mahory /
Ronan Scott
Jonathan English
M
ADV
8
1
Feidhlim Dunne
M
AST
4
Ast Monitors/Crew Members
1
2
3
4
Pablo Tello (R)
Ana Bautista
Jessica O´Neill
M
F
F
1
2
3
NO
Jesus Portillo
Julia Clara Garcia
Ferron
Joanna Smith (R)
CM
CM
AST
4
4
8
1
2
3
4
Shyam Patel
Marta Yera Gilabert
Sarah O´Neill
M
F
F
AST
CM
AST
4
4
8
August Staff – Monitors/Ast. Monitors/Crew Members
4
F
M
F
M
CM
CM
4
4
4
F
AST
4
1
2
Rory Jones (R)
Laura Piñana
NO
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1
2
3
4
5
6 (FCE)
M
M
F
F
F
M
4
4
4
2
2
4
M
M
F
F
F
TM/ T
WSR
GOLF
HR/NM
AST
Monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
st
Ronan Scott - 1 Aid
Siobhan Doyle
st
Sinead O´Connor 1 Aid
NO
1
2
3
Tristina Oppliguer
Michelle Flatley
Michelle Maher
F
F
F
M
AST
ADM
4
4
4
M
4
4
Ronan Scott
M
WSR
4
AST
POS
Teacher
Aske Schleicher
NO
Leora Glasgow
NO
NO
Daniel Bath (R)
4
4
Star- Management
Star Camp
Senior
Level
M TM/M
F
CM
Camp Dir.
Act Coord
Driver/Support
Name
Chrissy Jones (R)
Tristina Oppliguer
Niall Griffin
F
F
M
4
4
4
Extra Staff Camp TBD
Name
John Hands
M
TECS - Camp Manual 40
T
2
English Summer Camp
Little Village
Magic Village
Jun
Level
Teacher
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pink
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Aqua
Indigo
Purple
Jane Garvey
Pauline McKay
Chris Lydon (R)
Melissa Cappiello
Andrew Wielochowski
Dianne Reita
Chris Donovan (R)
Jill Hodgetts (T+R)
F
F
M
F
M
F
M
F
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Shane Horisk (R)
Jean Maher
Maggie Sauerhage
Neil Graham(R)
Caroline McCarthy
Anita Brady
Rebecca Cottingim (R)
Matthew Drumm
Brian McMorrow
Pablo Marin (R)
Michelle Flatley
Victor Setien
M
F
F
M
F
F
F
M
M
M
F
M
AC
M
M
M
NM
M
TM
M
LG
AST
AST
CM
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
4
12.
13.
NO
F
AST
Teacher
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tim Thomas (R)
Jennifer Benson
Kristi Carpenter
Alex MacMillan (R)
2 if can
Erin Schalow
Comic, News Radio
Advertising, Literature
Drama, Film, TV, Music
Monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Camp Dir.
Act Coord
TEFL
Coord
Driver/
support
4
4
4
4
2
2
Monitor
Little Village – Management
POS
M
F
F
TC
M
F
Ciara Faber(R)
Francis Douglas
Gemma Harper (R)
David McDermott
Clare Clancy
Catriona Curran
Rachel Slattery
Kealinn Ross
Rory Brennan
Ask Doug
Shane Curran
Pablo Gil
Sara Cordero
F
M
F
M
F
M
F
F
M
F
M
M
F
AC
TM
M
M
LG
M
NM/ADM
AST
AST
AST
AST
CM
CM
NO
NO
NO
F
M
M
M
M
M
4
4
2
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Magic Village – Management
Name
POS
Niall McCrory (R)
Sorcha Sheenan
Jill Hodgetts (T+R)
M
F
F
4
4
4
Scott MacCoinneach
M
4
Camp Dir.
TEFL Coord
Act Coord
Driver/Support
Nurse+WC
Ast.Wel Coord
Name
Inge ¨GET IN¨ Hol (R)
Alex MacMillan (R)
Sandra Hayden (R)
Daragh Quintin
Maria del Valle Godoy Bravo
Henry Bodega
M
M
F
M
F
M
Grazalema Colour Codes
Intermediate – Pink, Red
Intermediate Advanced - Orange, Yellow, Green
Upper Intermediate – Aqua, Indigo
FCE – Purple
TECS - Camp Manual 41
4
4
4
4
4
4
English Summer Camp
Go Camp
Junior
Level
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3
4
Go- Management
Teacher
Andrew Bell
Thomas Spaeth
Misty Brewster
NO
POS
M
M
F
F
4
2
4
4
F
M
M
F
M
F
F
F
M
4
4
LG 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Camp Dir.
Nurse/Welfare
Act Coord
Driver/Support
Name
Maria Canos (R)
Gregorio Garcia Gomez(R)
Ali Coleman (R)
F
M
F
M
4
4
4
4
Monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
CM
CM
CM
Am
Am
Lucia Mezquita (R)
NO
Manuel Bedoya
Silvia Marchena
NO
Maria Navarro Navarrete MALE
Alba Garrido del Cano
Leonor Pineda Martinez
Yes Eng Centr Guy MB
NO
Sports Camp
Sports- Management
POS
Name
Camp Dir.
Ast Dir.
Act Coord
TEFL Coord
Driver/Support
Bosco Gracia (R)
Andrea Escudero (R)
Thomas Connolly (R)
Emma Leigh
Richard Wiggins
M
F
M
4
4
4
4
4
M
Juniors
1.
2.
3.
4.
Junior
Level
Teacher
1
2
3
4
NO
Andrew Hewitt
Hayley McCann (R)
Catherine Whitaker
Seniors
Senior
Level
F
M
F
F
2
4
4
2
1.
2.
3.
4.
F
F
TC
M
4
4
4
4
1.
Maximilian Ottersbach
M
WSR
2.
Ronan Hunt
M
WSR
3.
4.
Padraig Conway
Linda Gormally
Bronagh O´Connor
M
F
F
GOL
TM
WSR
Monitor
1
2
3
5
Teacher
Chanelle Clark
Ashley Stevenson
Emma Leigh (R)
Brandon Burtts
Monitor
1.
Sam Parsons (TBC)
M
2.
Sophie Wood
F
3.
Serena Salmon
NO
NO
Santiago Merida Barrero
Mª Euegnia Reinares Rueda
F
AC/
WSR
WSR/
NM
GOL
M
M
F
AST
CM
CM
TECS - Camp Manual 42
English Summer Camp
Family Camp Leader Partners
Sophomores
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Monitor
1
2.
3.
4.
Boys
Girls
Girls
Girls
8
9
8
8
33
Darren Monaghan (M)
Elaine Smith (AC)
Emma McCarron (M)
Kirstie McArdle (M)
1.
2.
3.
Boys
Girls
Boys
9
14
9
32
Jamie Clark (TEFL Mon)
Alysia Topping (M)
Jamie Clark (M)
Total= 65
TENTS
M
F
Benjamin Crompton (T)
Michelle Flatley (AM)
Joy Venner (T)
Stuart Mac (T)
F
F
RESIDENCE
M
F
James Swain (Teacher)
Michelle Gurner (Teacher)
James Swain (T)
M
F
Juniors
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Monitor
1.
2.
3.
4.
Boys
Boys
Girls
Girls
9
9
13
Anita Hurst (M)
Joanna Moran (M)
Louise Gorman (M)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Boys
Boys
Boys
Girls
Girls
9
12
13
13
13
Lachlan Hall (M)
Niall O Connor (M)
Patrick Alvarez (M)
Catherine Maher (M)
Rachael Finnis (M)
TENTS
M
F
F
F
David Doyle (T)
Colin Pollock (T)
Samuel Hemmingway (T)
F
M
F
F
RESIDENCE
M
M
M
F
F
Slaven Ungar (T)
Gerald Thompson (T)
Shyam Patel (AM)
Kaylea Russell (T)
Ruth – Anne Farragher (T)
M
M
M
F
F
Seniors
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Monitor
TENTS
M
F
1.
2.
Girls
Girls
Boys
11
11
2
Liz Tinney (M)
Sarah O Mahoney (M)
Steven Byrne (M)
1.
2.
Boys
Girls
10
14
David Doyle (M)
Gemma Skelton (M)
M
F
3.
Girls
14
Jane Hedigan (M)
F
Alan Dolan (T)
Alex McMillan (T)
Johnathan English
RESIDENCE
Stuart McCoinneach (T)
Rachel Hugstad (T)
Keara Kennedy (T)
TECS - Camp Manual 43
F
F
M
F
F
English Summer Camp
Sport Camp Leader Partners
Juniors
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Monitor
1.
2.
Pilar
Pilar
Sam Parsons (AC)
1.
2.
Pilar
Pilar
Serena Salmon (M)
Sophie Wood (M)
Boys
M
Andrew Hewitt (T) + Santiago Merida (CM)
M
Girls
F
Hayley McCann (T) (R)
F
Catherine Whitaker (T) + MªEugenia Reinares
(CM)
M
M
F
M
Seniors
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Monitor
1. Monjas
2. Monjas
1.
2.
Marq.
Marq.
Maximilian Ottersbach (M)
Ronan Hunt (M)
Boys
M
F
Padraig Conway (M)
Brandon Burtts (T)
F
M
Linda Gormally (M)
Bronagh O´Connor
Girls
M
F
Ashley Stevenson (T)
Chanelle Clark (T)
F
F
Star Camp Leader Partners
Seniors
Leader Partner Monitor
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Females
1
2
Girls
Girls
Sinead O´Connor (M)
3
4
Boys
Boys
Josh Brister (M)
Ronan Scott (M)
F
F
Males
M
M
Leora Glasgow (T)
F
F
Aske Schleicher (T) + Siobhan Doyle (M)
Daniel Bath (T) (R) + Siobhan Doyle (M)
M
M
Little Village Leader Partners
ANGLOS
Leader Partner Monitor
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Females
1
2
3
4
5
Girls
Girls
Girls
Girls
Girls
Maggie Saurage (M)
Carolina McCarthy (M)
Rebecca Cottingim (M) (R)
Anita Brady (M)
Jean Maher (M)
6
7
8
9
Boys
Boys
Boys
Boys
Neil Graham (R)
Matthew Drumm (M)
Brian McMorrow (M)
Shane Horisk (AC)
F
Pauline McKay (T)
F
Melissa Cappiello (T)
F
Jane Garvey (T)
F
Dianne Reita (T)
F
Michelle Flatley (AM)
Males
M Andrew Wielochowski (T) + Victor Setien (CM)
M
Chris Donovan (T) (R)
M
Chris Lydon (T) (R)
M
Pablo Marin (AM)
TECS - Camp Manual 44
F
F
F
F
F
M
M
M
M
English Summer Camp
Magic Village Leader Partners
JUNIORS
Leader Partner Monitor
Leader Partner (Teacher, Monitor, Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Younger
1
2
Dragons
Wizards
Francis Douglas (M)
Gemma Harper (M) (R)
3
Titans
6
7
8
Dragons
Wizards
Titans
M
F
Jennifer Benson (T) + Shane Curran (AM)
2 week Male T + Sara Cordero (CM)
Clare Clancy (M)
M
Kristi Carpenter (T) + Pablo Gil (CM)
David McDermott (M)
Ciara Faber (AC)
Rachel Slattery (NM)
Older
M
F
F
Erin Schalow (T) + Shane Curran (AM)
Catriona Curran (M) + Rory Brennan (AM)
Tim Thomas (T) + Kealinn Ross (AM)
F
F
M
M
Go Camp Leader Partners
Pioneers
Leader Partner Monitor
Leader Partner (Monitor,
Ast Monitor/Crew M)
Teacher
Females
1
Girls
2
Girls
F
Boys
Males
M
Leonor Pineda (CM)
M
Male CM + Male AM
3
4
Youngest
Boys
Silvia Marchena (M)
Manuel Bedoya (M)
Lucia Mezquita (M)
F
Alba Garrido (CM) + Maria
Navarro (CM)
Misty Brewster (T)
F
F
Andrew Bell (T)
Thomas Spaeth (T)
TECS - Camp Manual 45
M
M
English Summer Camp
Chapter 5: Daily Programmes
TECS SUMMER CAMP
GENERAL TIMETABLE BY AGE GROUPS – “FAMILY CAMP” EL PUERTO DE SANTA MARIA
Sophomores
Juniors
Seniors
TIME
08.45
WAKE UP
TIME
08.30
WAKE UP
TIME
08.45
WAKE UP
09.00
MORNING WASH
09.00
BREAKFAST
09.30
BREAKFAST
09.15
MORNING EXERCISE
09.30
CLASS
10.00
CLASS
09.30
BREAKFAST
13.30
LUNCH
14.00
LUNCH
10.00
CLASS
14.00
PROJECTS
13.00
LUNCH
14.45
CHILL OUT in the Gym.+ phone out
14.40
(front lawn)
ARTS & CRAFTS + money 15.00-15.45. 16.00
13.4014.20
14.20
GAMES IN SAND PIT + Phone in & out
& money on Fridays and beach days.
ARTS & CRAFTS
16.00
SPORTS
18.00
TEA
17.30
TEA
18.30
SPORTS
15.30
EVEN ENT INTRO
16.00
SPORTS
18.00
SPORTS & COMPETITIONS
19.30
17.00
TEA
20.00
20.30
17.15
19.15
SPORTS & COMPETITIONS
SHOWERS: Cleaning of campsite
showers 19.55-20.05
DINNER
LEADER BONDING with teacher
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
COOL DOWN – CIRCLE GAMES
TIDY UP ROOM, CLOTHES READY
FOR TOMORROW
BED TIME
20.45
21.15
SHOWERS: Cleaning of campsite
showers 19.55-20.05,20.30-20.35
DINNER
MINI EVEN ENT with monitors
POOL ACTIVITIES + THE ZONE +
phone in + out. Money 20.00-20.30
SHOWERS: cleaning 20.30-35
21.15
21.45
DINNER
CHILL OUT OR EVEN ENT PREP
21.45
23.00
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
BED TIME
22.15
00.00
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
BED TIME
20.00
20.30
21.00
22.10
22:20
22.30
ACTIVITY
ACTIVITY
ACTIVITY
SPORTS & COMPETITIONS
TECS - Camp Manual 46
English Summer Camp
TECS SUMMER CAMP
INTERCAMP COMP TIMETABLES – “FAMILY CAMP” EL PUERTO
Juniors - SECOND TUESDAY in Family
Camp
TIME
ACTIVITY
Seniors – SECOND WEDNESDAY in Family
Camp
TIME
ACTIVITY
08.30
WAKE UP
08.45
WAKE UP
09.00
BREAKFAST
09.15
BREAKFAST
09.30
CLASS
10.00
CLASS
13.30
LUNCH
14.00
LUNCH
14.00
CHILL OUT in the Gym.+ phone out
15.00
Chill out/ preparation for competition (face paint, posters, etc.)
14.45
ARTS & CRAFTS + money 15.00-15.45.
16.0020.00
20.00
INTERCAMP SPORTS COMPETITIONS (Tea at some point
between activities, presentation of cup)
Chill out
16.0020.00
20.00
INTERCAMP SPORTS COMPETITIONS (Tea at some point between
activities, presentation of cup)
Chill out
20.30
SHOWERS
20.30
Dinner
21.15
DINNER
21.15
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
21.45
CHILL OUT OR EVEN ENT PREP
22.30
SHOWERS
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
23.00
BED TIME
22.0000.00
00.00
BED TIME
TECS - Camp Manual 47
English Summer Camp
TECS SUMMER CAMP
GENERAL TIMETABLE BY AGE GROUPS – “STAR CAMP” SOTOGRANDE
Daily Timetable
TIME
09.00-09.45
10.00
10.15
11.45-13.00
13.00-14.30
14.30-15.15
15.15-16.00
16.00-16.15
16.30-19.30
19.45-21.00
ACTIVITY
00.00
01.00
04.00
ACTIVITY
BREAKFAST
09.00-09.45
BREAKFAST
FORM UP FOR CLASS
10.00
FORM UP FOR CLASS
CLASS: MASTER PACK PART or SET
PROJECT/CONVO (1/2)
FREE TIME: POOL, SHOP, BEDROOM, GAME ROOM
ETC…
CLASS: SET PROJECT + CLASS CONVERSATION or
MASTER PACK (1/2)
LUNCH WITH TEACHER
10.15
CLASS: MASTER PACK PART or SET PROJECT/CONVO (1/2
11.45-12.00
SHORT BREAK WITH TEACHER
12.00-13.30
CLASS: SET PROJECT + CLASS CONVERSATION or MASTER PACK (1/2)
13.30-14.00
LUNCH
YOUNG ACHIEVERS POINTS GIVING AND TASK
ASSIGNING (Money 15.15-15.45)
DEPART TO EXTRA ACTIVITIES
14.00
DEPART FOR FAMILY CAMP
16.00-20.00
INTERCAMP SPORTS COMPETITION (Tea at some point between activities,
EXTRA ACTIVITIES
20.15
DEPART FOR STAR CAMP
SHOWERS AND FREE TIME.
22.00
DINNER
22.45-23.30
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT (DISCO)
23.30-00.00
CHILL OUT
CHILL OUT
00.00
ALL TO OWN ROOMS
ALL TO OWN ROOMS
01.00
LIGHTS OUT
LIGHTS OUT
04.00
GUARD TO BED
presentation of cup)
DINNER
21.00-21.45
21.45-23.00/30 EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
23.30/30-00.00
Intercamp Timetable
TIME
Guard to bed
TECS - Camp Manual 48
English Summer Camp
TECS SUMMER CAMP
GENERAL TIMETABLE BY AGE GROUPS – “GO CAMP” EL Barriche
Daily Timetable
ACTIVITY
TIME
08.15
08.30
08.45
09.10
WAKE UP (Campers going to activities)
WAKE UP (Campers going to class)
BREAKFAST (Campers going to activities)
BREAKFAST (Campers going to class)
09.15-12.45
09.30-11.30
Intercamp Timetable (First Tuesday)
Lang*
ACTIVITY
TIME
Span
08.15
WAKE UP
Span
08.45
BREAKFAST
CAMPERS DOING ADVENTURE ACTIVITIES
HALF CAMPERS IN IMMERSION ENGLISH CLASS
Eng &
Span
09.15-11.15
ALL CAMPERS IN CLASS (CLASSES COMBINED)
11.30-11.45
CLASS BREAK
Eng
11.15-11.30
BREAK
11.45-13.15
HALF CAMPERS IN IMMERSION ENGLISH CLASS
Eng
12.45-13.15
13.15-14.00
14.00-14.45
SHOWERS (Campers who did activities)
LUNCH
HOUSE COMPETITION
CHILL OUT + phone out + MONEY
(Half camper making calls and half chilling out in or around
pool)
CAMPERS DOING ADVENTURE ACTIVITIES
HALF CAMPERS IN IMMERSION ENGLISH CLASS
Span
Eng
Eng
11.30-12.45
ALL CAMPERS IN CLASS (CLASSES COMBINED)
12.45-13.30
13.30
LUNCH
DEPART FOR FAMILY CAMP
16.00-20.00
INTERCAMP SPORTS COMPETITION (Tea at some point between
activities, presentation of cup)
20.15
DEPART FOR GO CAMP
22.30
DINNER
23.00
SHOWERS
23.30
BED TIME
14.45-15.30
15.30-17.15
17.15-17.30
17.30-19.00
19.00-20.00
19.00-20.00
20.00-20.45
20.45-22.30
22.30-23.00
23.00
TEA
CAMPERS DOING ADVENTURE ACTIVITIES
HALF CAMPERS IN IMMERSION ENGLISH CLASS
CREATIVE PROJECTS (Campers who were IN CLASS)
SHOWERS (Campers who did activities)
DINNER
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
CHILL OUT TIME IN LEADER GROUPS IN SLEEPING AREA
BED TIME
Span
Eng &
Span
Eng &
Span
Eng &
Span
Eng
Span
Span
Eng
Span
Span
* GO Camp has a mixed language program in which campers will be permitted to speak Spanish at certain times of the day. This is represented by the
colour shirt of the staff (Red= English, White= Spanish). This division is only for the normal Daily Timetable, not for the Intercamp Competition day.
TECS - Camp Manual 49
English Summer Camp
TECS SUMMER CAMP
GENERAL TIMETABLE BY AGE GROUPS – “SPORTS CAMP” SANCTI PETRI
Juniors
Intercamp Timetable (First Tuesday)
TIME
08.30
WAKE UP
TIME
08.30
WAKE UP
09.00
BREAKFAST
09.00
BREAKFAST
09.30
CLASS
09.30
CLASS
13.30
LUNCH
13.30
LUNCH
14.1515.15
15.1515.45
15.45
POOL TIME CHILL OUT in the Gym.+ phone out + money
14.20
DAILY COLOUR WAR COMPETITION/CHALLENGE
14.45
PREPARATION FOR INTECAMP (FACE PAINTING, SIGNS,
ETC.)
LEAVE FOR FAMILY CAMP
ENGLISH STAMPBOOK with teacher and monitor.
16.00-20.00
INTERCAMP SPORTS COMPETITION (Tea at some point between
16.00
WATER SPORTS ACTIVITES
20.15
activities, presentation of cup)
LEAVE FOR SPORTS CAMP
20.15
SHOWERS
21.00
DINNER
21.00
DINNER
21.30
SHOWERS
21.45
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
22.15
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
23.00
DOWN TIME IN BEDROOMS AND SECOND REVIEW OF IBOOK.
BED TIME
23.15
BED TIME
23.15
ACTIVITY
ACTIVITY
TECS - Camp Manual 50
English Summer Camp
TECS SUMMER CAMP
GENERAL TIMETABLE BY AGE GROUPS – “SPORTS CAMP” SANCTI PETRI
Seniors
Intercamp Timetable (First Wednesday)
TIME
08.45
WAKE UP
TIME
08.45
WAKE UP
09.15
BREAKFAST
09.15
BREAKFAST
10.00-14 WATER SPORTS ACTIVITES
10.00
CLASS IN MARQUESA (CHECK WITH DIRECTOR)
14.30
LUNCH
14.00
LUNCH
15.15
POOL TIME CHILL OUT in the Gym.+ phone out + money
14.45
LEAVE FOR FAMILY CAMP
16.00
YOUNG ACHIEVERS DAILY REVIEW
16.00-20.00
INTERCAMP SPORTS COMPETITION (Tea at some point between
16.30
CLASS
20.15
activities, presentation of cup)
LEAVE FOR SPORTS CAMP
20.45
SHOWERS:
21.00
SHOWERS
21.30
DINNER
21.45
DINNER
22.15
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
22.30
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
00.00
DOWN TIME IN BEDROOMS AND SECOND REVIEW OF
YOUNG ACHIEVERS
BED TIME
00.00
DOWN TIME IN BEDROOMS AND SECOND REVIEW OF
YOUNG ACHIEVERS
BED TIME
00.15
ACTIVITY
00.15
ACTIVITY
TECS - Camp Manual 51
English Summer Camp
TECS SUMMER CAMP
GENERAL TIMETABLE BY AGE GROUPS – “LITTLE VILLAGE”
ANGLOS
ACTIVITY
TIME
09.00
WAKE UP
09.30
BREAKFAST: leave breakfast at 10.00
10.15-11.45
COMMUNICATIVE CLASS PART 1: HALF of the TEACHERS INDOOR CLASSES, HALF OUTDOORS.
11.45-12.15
BREAK
12.15-13.45
COMMUNICATIVE CLASS PART 2: HALF of the TEACHERS INDOOR CLASSES, HALF OUTDOORS.
14.00
LUNCH
14.30
CHILL OUT + MONEY + PHONE FRIDAY ONLY OF FIRST WEEK.
15.00
EDUCATIONAL PROJECT: THEATRE, CREW MEMBER TRAINING, POLITICAL PARTY ETC..
17.00
FIRST ACTIVITY SESSION: OPTION OF THREE ACTIVITIES: (TWO SPORTING, ONE NOT)
18.00
TEA
18.30
SECOND ACTIVITY SESSION: OPTION OF THREE ACTIVITIES: (TWO SPORTING, ONE NOT)
19.30
THIRD ACTIVITY SESSION: OPTION OF THREE ACTIVITIES: (TWO SPORTING, ONE NOT)
20.30
SHOWERS
21.15
DINNER
21.45
TECS YOUNG ACHIEVERS AWARD POINTS GIVING
22.15
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT: VERY LANGUAGE BASED ACTIVITIES.
23.30/4500.00/15
00.15
Cabin time (students can go to bed during this time)
BED TIME
TECS - Camp Manual 52
English Summer Camp
TECS SUMMER CAMP
MAGIC VILLAGE General Timetable
Daily Timetable
TIME
ACTIVITY
Intercamp Competition Timetable
TIME
ACTIVITY
08.30
WAKE UP
08.30
WAKE UP
09.10
BREAKFAST: leave breakfast 09.40
09.10
BREAKFAST: leave breakfast 09.40
09.4511.15
11.1511.30
11.3013.00
13.00
ENGLISH IN ACTION: CAMP LANGUAGE – FUN DYNAMIC ACTIVITIES
TO LEARN USEFUL CAMP LANG.
BREAK
ENGLISH IN ACTION
PRODUCTION….ENGLISH THROUGH t.v., music, advertising etc…
LUNCH
09.4511.15
11.1511.30
11.3013.00
13.00
13.45
CHILL OUT + phone out + MONEY
13.30
DEPART FOR FAMILY CAMP
14.30
16.0020.00
20.15
INTERCAMP SPORTS COMPETITION (Tea at some point between
16.00
“TRAIN TO BE THE BEST” (students choose activity + monitor coaches
them in it for 1 week)
ACTIVITY TIME (adventure sports + pool time)
19.00
HOUSE COMPETITION TIME
22.00
DINNER
20.00
SHOWERS:
22.30
SHOWERS
20.45
21.15
DINNER
TECS ENGLISH HOUSE STAR AWARD and HOUSE GATHERING
23.00
23.30
CHILL OUT TIME IN CHOZOS
BED TIME
21.45
23.00
EVENING ENTERTAINMENT
BED TIME
ENGLISH THROUGH MEDIA TO INSPIRE ENGLISH
BREAK
ENGLISH THROUGH MEDIA
LUNCH
activities, presentation of cup)
DEPART FOR MAGIC VILLAGE
TECS - Camp Manual 53
English Summer Camp
An Introduction to the Daily Programme
From Monday to Friday the kids follow a set routine. Each Age Group has their own
programme which they follow as detailed in the schedules above. Needless to say
dealing with so many kids in a foreign language necessitates adhering to a closely
managed programme. At times you might feel like you are living your life according to
a Military timetable but believe us without it, camp just wouldn’t work!
At weekends the whole camp goes off on fun day excursions doing such things as
whale watching, visiting theme parks, or seeing the monkeys in Gibraltar. More
details regarding the excursions can be found in the section on Excursions below and
the Excursions Manual.
What follows is detailed information about how a typical day from Monday to Friday
works on camp. Your responsibilities are expanded on and there are also lots of
useful tips to help make your life easier!
NOTE Staff should also acquaint themselves with the Changeovers document and
the article “A Day in the Life of a Camper” which are both in the appendix.
Getting Up Routine
Every day starts with a wake up call. The wake up calls will be done by the
Coordinators at each group’s respective time. The on duty staff member is then
responsible for the following within their leader groups:
• Getting children up.
• Making sure the children tidy their tent/room.
• Making sure the children have everything they need for the day (e.g. sports
gear - trainers / towel / swimsuits / sunscreen / water – check the daily
schedule to see what activities your kids are doing). This is because when
the kids leave for breakfast they don’t return to their sleeping area until after
the sports sessions.
• With younger children making sure appropriate hygiene matters are
addressed.
Please note kids don’t shower at this time. They shower in the evening after sports.
Room / Tent Inspection
Every morning the Activity Coordinator will inspect their Age Groups rooms and tents.
Each room / tent will be awarded points out of 20. The winning boys and girls’ tent /
room each day will be announced at breakfast. The daily winners will then have the
opportunity to vote for the staff member they wish to be “gunked”3 at Casino Night.
The two staff members with the most votes from each Age Group on the morning of
Casino Night will then form the dreaded “Gunk List” – only these staff members can
be voted for on Casino Night. During Casino Night (probably the best night on camp)
kids play games to win tokens to vote for an unlucky member of the “Gunk List”.
3
This involves a nice coloured liquid being poured over the staff members head! See the
Evening Entertainments section for more information.
TECS - Camp Manual 54
English Summer Camp
Any tent or room receiving less than 13 points will have to perform a punishment.
This will involve punishments such as performing a litter pick, hence this together
with the lure of receiving a “Gunk Vote” forms an excellent carrot and stick approach
to making the kids clean their rooms and surprisingly most kids really get into it.
Also the winning girls and boy’s tent / room at the end of each camp will receive an
award at the Awards Ceremony.
With all these inspections of the children’s sleeping areas and everyone promoting
cleanliness it is important to note that there will be an inspection of staff quarters
once a week. We do not accept untidiness among our staff. When we have an
arrivals or departures day there are parents who tour our facilities and it is possible
that they will see your room, we expect everyone to be responsible for tidying their
own area. Living in such close confinements it is important to respect those around
you especially considering that you’ll be working and living with them. After all,
children copy what they see.
NOTE there are no inspections at weekends due to the need to prepare quickly for
excursions. However all children should still be encouraged to clean.
Breakfast
The next stage of the day is breakfast. All Age Groups (bar the Seniors who have
free seating) have all their meals on their set leader group table. The leader sits with
the kids.
Table control during breakfast, like during all meals is paramount. Good staff
members who set standards and clarify rules for their group make meal times look
like a breeze, but staff members who fail to establish control from the start can find
meal times very stressful affairs as kids fight over food and refuse to clean their
tables. Hence it’s paramount to ensure that you set a routine for your group from the
start. Here are some general tips for maintaining table control.
Meal Time Table Control
Eating with the children can be a very stressful experience and particularly if it is not
done well. The following procedure exists to help you maintain table control and help
the kitchen staff with cleaning:
•
Always accompany your leader or class group to meal times. At no point
should children, including the Seniors, go to dinner without the staff member
responsible for them.
•
Make sure there is enough space and chairs for everyone, if not, inform your
Coordinator who will get you an extra table or chairs and inform the kitchen if
an extra space needs to be set. The responsible staff must always sit on the
table with the children.
•
Distribute food fairly and ensure and that the children respect all normal table
manners.
Also supervise the children who are known to have eating
problems to ensure that they eat and always encourage all the children to eat
a good quantity of food.
TECS - Camp Manual 55
English Summer Camp
•
Remember no child should leave the table for any reason other than going to
the toilet or getting some food from the kitchen after first agreeing it with you.
•
Ensure that the children stack all plates in the middle of the table with the left
over food on the silver platter and the cutlery on one plate or bowl. A
designated child should also wipe down the table.
•
Ensure the children do not leave your table until you are told to move on to
the next activity by the Coordinator, then make sure that you escort the
children to the relevant activity.
The above procedure can be tiring to enforce on excited Spanish children but like
almost everything with children, the procedure can be made easier if it is made fun.
Below are some fun activities some of our successful staff have used to enforce
discipline at meal times in a fun but effective way.
•
•
•
MR FREEZE: children know that the staff member will shout freeze at various
points throughout the meal. When they do the children must freeze in the
position they are in. The first child to unfreeze has to stack up the plates at
the end of the meal or alternatively you can play it until only one child is still
frozen.
THUMB MASTER: Children know that at some point during meal the staff
member will put his thumb on the table when they do, the kids must copy and
the last one to notice has to wipe the table.
SILENCE: Staff member shouts “silence” and kids know that from this point
on they can not talk. Like with freeze, the first child to make a noise has to do
one of the cleaning duties.
And always remember that meal times represent an excellent opportunity to practise
very basic and functional language with the kids. Teach them the relevant
vocabulary. Even the weakest kids can learn “Can you pass me the ________
please?”
Food on Camp
The quality of the food on camp is generally not bad and something we continually
work with our kitchens on both camps to improve.
Please though remember a few points with regard to the food:
• It’s not a restaurant!! Cooking for 300 people is not easy
• What you say will influence the opinions of the children therefore even if you
dislike something, you should never complain about it in front of the children.
To be honest you will just be making your work more difficult as Spanish kids
can be fussy eaters at the best of times!
• Vegetarians are catered for but be prepared for repetition of the dishes.
• Vegetarians are not common in Spain and therefore Spanish chefs tend not
to understand very well the fact that it is not acceptable for vegetarians to eat
a dish which was cooked with meat but has had it removed. Of course we
continuously clarify this with our chefs but to be 100% sure of what you are
eating, daily, you will need to check up on these things yourself.
• You have to be a vegetarian to choose this option, you cannot choose on the
day or the end of week 1 to be a vegetarian.
TECS - Camp Manual 56
English Summer Camp
•
There are only a certain number of vegetarian dishes made each day so
these dishes are only for those staff members who are vegetarians.
Sports Camp will have a buffet style setup for meals.
English Class
After breakfast the kids go to English class. These classes are divided by English
level within each Age Group and each teacher will be responsible for the same class
during the 2 week cycle of camp. More information on teaching can be found in the
Teachers Resource Manual.
Teachers must take Sophomores to the bathroom to wash their hands before lunch.
Lunch
From English class it is off to lunch. Arrangements are the same as for breakfast,
although this time both leader partners will be responsible for supervising their leader
group.
Chill Out
After lunch each group goes off to their chill out area. During this time the kids must
be supervised. Staff are also encouraged to participate in games with the kids. They
love this and sitting on the side looking at your watch isn’t acceptable!! Chilll out time
is an opportunity to get to know different kids and promote more English.
Arts and Crafts / Projects (Seniors)
Please refer to the Arts and Crafts or Senior Project Manual for more info.
Arts and Crafts sessions offer the opportunity for kids to be more creative. It’s also a
good chance for them to make things to take home and impress their parents.
The A&C classes are run by both a monitor and a teacher with groups of up to 16
children. There will be assigned arts and crafts projects per day, see Arts and Crafts
Manual for more details. Some age groups may spend a number of Arts and Crafts
sessions preparing their performances for Performance night together with any props
and costumes required.
Family camp has a Specialist Coordinator. This person is responsible for organising
materials and providing staff members with ideas and inspiration for their classes.
Use them, they are sure to have lots of great suggestions!
Some important notes:
•
Each A&C group will have their own box with their group’s name which is
stored in the Art Room. Attached to the front of this box is a sheet which
must be completed by staff members before and after each class with the
details of the activity they are going to do the next day. This allows the
responsible, in Family Camp´s case it is the Specialist Coordinator, to fill your
TECS - Camp Manual 57
English Summer Camp
box with what you will need for the activity. This box is then picked up before
class and returned to the Art Room at the end of the day.
•
Tidy up must be done everyday. Remember the class you use for Arts and
Crafts is also an English class! Tidy up includes not only tidying the
classroom but also returning your box to the Art Room and making sure all
materials used have been cleaned: paint pallets, paint brushes etc. and that
the bathrooms have been left tidy.
•
Each teacher will have a general materials box which they will use both for
teaching time and the A&C sessions. This box and the materials inside are
the teacher’s responsibility and they must make sure that this box is available
for Arts and Crafts classes’ everyday.
•
Only the Coordinators have a key to the material’s cupboard so therefore you
must get one of them to open the cupboard in order to get any extra materials
needed during A&C time. The cupboard will be locked at all times in order to
stop the children having access to it and to prevent the cupboard from quickly
becoming a mess.
•
Any special material needed for an A&C session or evening entertainment will
need to be ordered through your Coordinator or the Specialist Coordinator
well ahead of time as possible.
•
Colour War points will be awarded for the items that kids make. The
Coordinator must be informed that you have made something that you wish to
be judged. They will then attend your class and judge the children’s work
awarding 5 points for the best work, 3 for second and 1 for third. Make sure
you do this as it is a great way to motivate kids.
•
After your kids have made something the items must be stored safely in the
class. Don’t let kids take them out of the class (other than friendship
bracelets). At the end of camp the Specialist Coordinator will arrange for your
group’s work to be taken down to the Departures hall and displayed when the
kids leave for their parents to see. They then pick up their work as they
leave. This is a great motivating tool for the kids and hopefully you as well as
no one wants to have the worst looking table on display during departures!!
•
Sometimes you will have time left over. In Family Camp, Sophomores should
use this time to work on their TECS mural (a prize will be given for the best at
the Awards Ceremony). Juniors should work on their performance and
costumes for Performance or any A&C activity that had not been completely
finished. Also you can use the time to play language related games. Kids
love them and they are great for learning English!
Creative Projects (Family Camp)
Projects are done by the Seniors instead of A&C. Teachers and Monitors will be
assigned to run a project either on their own or with other staff members. The
possible projects include:
• Magazine (responsible for producing the camp magazine).
• Drama (will perform a play to the other Seniors).
• Film (will make a film which will be shown on Departure Days).
TECS - Camp Manual 58
English Summer Camp
•
•
•
•
Basketball training / Gaelic Football (Puerto only) (in preparation for clash of
the Titans and Staff/Camper matches).
Music (they will write a song and perform it to the Seniors).
Dance (under the leadership of the Dance specialist they will develop a dance
to perform at the Awards Ceremony)
Crew Member Training (high level Seniors will have the opportunity to learn
what it is like to be a Crew Member)
Little Village will run an Educational Project session with the monitors and teachers.
Each camper is in the same group throughout the length of the camp. The projects
are similar to the projects in Family Camp however they are displayed and presented
to the parents on departures day. Projects include Evening Entertainment design,
Art, Film, Magazine, and Nature.
Magic Village will also run Creative projects, supervised by the monitors.
Sports
Please review the Sports and Games Manual for more info.
Sports sessions take place in the afternoon. Before coming to camp children select
whether they want to do Multi-Activity sports on camp or go off site to do activities
such as water sports, horse riding and tennis. The kids going off site are known as
“Non Multi Activity” campers (see the chapter on Groups for more information). One
of our monitors goes with these kids to their chosen sport (sailing, tennis, horse riding
etc) to supervise the children but the activities are run by our contractors.
The Sophomore and Junior multi-activity campers are organised in groups of 10-16
campers. With Sophomore groups there are normally two staff per group to ease
supervision. The Sophomores and Juniors follow a set programme of activities,
some of which take place on site and others off site (such as trips horse-riding or to
the beach). Competitions are also organised on an Age Group level. Seniors as well
as having Competition days (including an inter-camp competition for the Seniors)
each day can select their activities from a range of options.
More details of the different sports can be found in the sports manual. With all the
sports sessions the idea is not to turn kids into the next David Beckham or Michael
Jordan. Rather the goal is to ensure kids are participating, enjoying themselves and
being exposed to instruction in English.
Getting the Best out of the Kids
The most effective way to bring out the best in the children is to be organised with
your activities and to keep them as entertaining as possible. Like everything you do
on camp remember enthusiasm is contagious, if you are enthusiastic about the
activities, the children in turn will follow your lead. Equally contagious is boredom, if
you sit back from a session the children quickly lose interest without your attention,
and will either stop playing altogether or misbehave.
Finally the most effective tool to help you with the multi-activity sessions is PRAISE.
If a child does something good and you see it, you should tell that child straight away
and PRAISE them for their achievements. Children love to be seen doing something
good and will try and try again just to hear their teacher say “Well Done!” If you want
TECS - Camp Manual 59
English Summer Camp
to improve the children’s playing abilities praise them when they do something right,
not criticise them for the things they do wrong.
Sports Sessions Structure
Below are guidelines on how every sports session, regardless of the sport, should be
run. The procedure should help make things easier for you and ensure the children
learn all the basic rules and safety regulations and get an opportunity to drill skills
and practice these in a match format. This format works perfectly for Sophomores
and Juniors but will have to be adapted for Seniors with more focus on matches and
competitions.
Sport Session Guidelines
Essentials for control and instruction:
• Speak slowly and clearly. Ask the campers to repeat the key concepts to
ensure they understand.
• Use your whistle. Campers are quick to come to order when they hear it.
• Don’t let the children touch the equipment until drills begin.
• Before explaining the next concept, blow your whistle, have children place
balls, sticks etc on the ground, so that you have their attention.
• After you have finished with a piece of equipment immediately tidy it away.
Kids are easily distracted by balls etc left lying around
• Use proscribed disciplinary procedure for dealing with problem children. If
one-on-one conversation fails, call the Activity Coordinator to deal with the
child.
Below is a basic structure for a sports session:
•
Warm-Up: Running then stretching. Relays and follow-the-leader can be
integrated into running. This can be made fun!
•
Introduce and drill important vocabulary. For example, uni-hockey terms
include STICK, PUCK, GOAL, PASS, SHOOT, DRIBBLE, etc.
•
Explain safety issues. For example campers should not be allowed to raise
hockey sticks above waist level or swing rackets or bats near others.
•
Introduce basic skills. For example, demonstrate dribbling in basketball,
setting in volleyball, serving in badminton, etc.
•
Drill basic skills. Distribute equipment and allow the campers to practice the
basic skills in pairs or small groups.
•
Small games. For example, three-on-three basketball, four-square
volleyball, etc.
•
Color War Match! Full-court basketball games, Badminton Ladders,
Rounders and Cricket tournament.
Safety during Sports Sessions
TECS - Camp Manual 60
English Summer Camp
During sports sessions Monitors are responsible for the safety of their sports group.
Safety must be a constant element in every session.
Safety precautions involve:
• using safe equipment and giving instructions on how to use it properly,
• Ensuring campers abide by the rules set and disciplining children who break
the rules.
NOTE During sports sessions all campers AND staff must wear TRAINERS. Flip
flops can NOT be worn. Co-ordinators will be strict in enforcing this procedure. This
procedure is important for safety as we have had far too many stubbed toes in the
past!
Also all staff and campers must wear t-shirts during sports sessions UNLESS it is a
swimming session.
Extra Activities
Children participating in Non-Multi activities such as sailing, tennis, horse riding are
supervised by a Specialty Monitor travelling to and from the activity, as well as during
the session.
Children who participate in these activities are generally placed in the same Arts and
Crafts group to facilitate the transportation procedure. Children participating in extra
activities may need to leave the Art and Crafts or project session 15 minutes before
the other children (the Activity Coordinator will communicate this). The A&C monitor
will then directly take these children to the Specialty Monitor in charge of the extra
activity to board the coaches.
Monitors need to pay extra attention to the children returning from the extra activities,
as they arrive at different times. After getting off the bus, the Welfare Coordinator will
take them to their age group. Be aware, some children may need help reintegrating
into the group.
Accident Procedure
It is important to know what to do in the event of an accident in one of your sessions.
During the sports sessions the Nurse Monitor will be on duty in the infirmary.
Therefore if the camper can walk easily, send him/her to the nurse monitor
immediately with a friend. The friend must be instructed to return to inform the leader
of the action taken. This then needs to be reported to your Coordinator and Welfare
Responsible. This is essential as we need to know what happened so we are aware
of the situation should any parent call asking about the incident (this is quite
common).
If the camper is hurt so that they can not move/walk get another camper to get the
Nurse Monitor, Welfare Responsible or Assistant Director. They will decide the next
procedure i.e. take them to hospital.
TECS - Camp Manual 61
English Summer Camp
Showers
After sports it is time for showers. This will be the first time the campers have been
back to their room / tent since leaving for breakfast. Shower time is always
supervised by staff, firstly to ensure in respect of the youngest children that they are
washing properly and secondly to make sure that the kids aren’t messing around
damaging property.4
In the case of the Sophomores and some Juniors, shower supervision is essential for
making sure the children are washing themselves properly, and in the case of the of
all age groups, essential for making sure the campers are behaving themselves and
respecting all camp property.
Who supervises the kids for showers?
Family Camp
Sophomores:
Juniors and Seniors:
Sport Camp
Juniors:
Seniors:
Star Camp
Seniors:
Little Village
Anglos:
Magic Village
Juniors:
Go Camp
Pioneers:
Monitors
First 30 minutes by the Teacher and then the remaining
time by both the Monitors and the Teachers. The idea
here is that this is a good time to relax with your Leader
Group, speak English with them and generally get to
know them.
First 15 minutes by both the Monitors and the Teachers,
then just teachers
Monitors, then Monitors and Teachers for the last 30
minutes.
All monitors the first 15 minutes, then on a 30 minute
rota system.
Monitors
Teacher and then the last 15 minutes by both the
Monitors and the Teachers.
Monitors
4
In the past we have had damaged shower curtains, broken doors and ripped tents which
perhaps could have been prevented by closer supervision.
TECS - Camp Manual 62
English Summer Camp
General
After showers, kids are taken to dinner as a Leader Group. Make sure they have
everything they need for the Evening Entertainment (i.e. colour war t-shirts for
Capture the Flag etc).
Dinner
At dinner supervise your kids as at breakfast and dinner. Often dinners can be quite
noisy raucous affairs especially if the Evening Ent involves a Colour War event!
Leader Bonding / Chill Out
After dinner Leader Bonding is held for the Sophomores and Juniors in Family Camp.
The Seniors have chill out time in their Zones before the Evening Entertainment.
For the Sophomores leader bonding is done by the Teachers5 and for the Juniors by
both leader partners.6 Leader Bonding is a fun time to get to know your leader group.
You should find an area for your group and play fun circle games, sing songs / camp
chants. Done well this can be a lot of fun for all involved.
Evening Entertainments
Please refer to the Evening Entertainments Manual for more info.
The Evening Entertainment parts of the day are the heart beat of the camp. They
really are the best part of the day for staff and campers alike and are sure to provide
you with many memories to take away.
Evening Entertainments require a great deal of organisation, teamwork, enthusiasm
and energy. The key to any event is the participation of the staff: the more involved
you are, the more the kids enjoy the event. Staff will be assigned certain tasks to do
and the Coordinator will always expect their staff to participate and not just sit on the
sidelines.
Remember the more you participate, the more you enjoy the event and the better you
do your job and therefore the more contented you feel….it is all connected!
Brief Descriptions
Detailed info on Evening Ents including set up instructions can be found in the
Evening Ent manual. However the descriptions below give you a rough idea of the
types of events that you will be involved in. The exact schedule of Evening
Entertainments will be communicated to you by your Activity Co-ordinator through
your Age Group programme.
Aqua-attack (Juniors): This is a similar game to Capture the Flag but this time the
objective is not to capture the other team’s flag but rather get past their defences and
then hurl water balloons at two targets, if you hit you get points, but don’t get too
excited yet because you have to defend as well as you attack.
5
6
Sophomore Monitors are on their half hour break at this time.
Though some staff may be called away at this time to help with Evening Ent set up.
TECS - Camp Manual 63
English Summer Camp
Awards Ceremony (All Age Groups): This is the last night activity where after 2
weeks of two colours fighting it out, one is finally declared the outright CHAMPION of
colour war. Prizes are given out, on stage in front of the whole camp (serious stuff!),
to winners of individual sports and arts and craft competitions. Prizes are also
awarded to special people who contributed wholeheartedly to Colour War and
awards are given to the winners of the tent and room inspections. This is a great
way to end camp and provides an emotional end to colour war, be prepared to jump
with joy and sing victory songs if your colour wins.
BBQ (All Age Groups): This is a night of greater freedom for the children. In Family
Camp the children are taken to a local beach where a barbecue dinner of
hamburgers, sausages, chips, etc is eaten on the beach. At the beach a fire is lit,
camp fire songs sung, beach games played and mountains of fun had. This is great
night for really getting to know the campers in a majestic coastal location. This is
usually one of the most popular night time activities and a great opportunity for the
children to relax and socialise in a controlled environment.
Blind Date (Seniors Only): This is a performance competition where one lucky boy
and girl must select a date from three competitors. The competitors are on stage in
front of their peers and they must shine: amusing questions are asked: “What is the
funniest thing that has happened to you when you have been trying to flirt with a
girl?”, and amusing answers given: “well once I told a girl that she was in my dreams
last night and she replied you were in mine too but then she added; I showed you the
door just like I am doing now!!!”. The dates are judged on their answers, and usually
the funniest ones are the best, so be prepared to help the campers be both romantic
and witty!!
Bonfire (Sophomores Only): Bonfires are held in the sand pit area for the
Sophomore Age Group. A fire will be built and lit for the group to sit around singing
and playing games. This is a fun filled and relaxing night after a long and tiring day.
Capture the Flag (Sophomores/Juniors): This game begins the Colour War, and is
undoubtedly the most intense and hotly contested of all colour clashes. The game is
more or less a sophisticated form of tag. Each team has a flag and the aim of the
game is to capture the other colour’s flag while defending your own. Each player
wears a sash, which represents his/her life, attached to their shorts. Capturing an
opponent’s sash wins points and temporarily eliminates that player from the game.
The game may sound simple but it is certainly always a passionate encounter. A
memorable way to start Colour War!
Christmas Night (Sophomores): Christmas only comes once a year but not at
TECS. Sophomores work to decorate the hall and make Christmas related clothes.
It’s then time for traditional Christmas related games and fun for all!
Performance Night (Sophomores/Juniors): This is a performance night where the
campers get to show of all their costume making and acting skills. In Arts and Crafts
classes, groups will be given time to prepare a performance and costume. In
previous years we’ve had: pirates, a sketch of the TECS staff, drag queens,
gladiators and many more. The performance is then performed in front of the whole
Age Group and voting is done Eurovision song contest style, with the winners being
awarded prizes at the end. Also there are performances by the staff, so be prepared
for an action filled evening. Usually one of camps big successes!
TECS - Camp Manual 64
English Summer Camp
Casino Night (All Together, not in Sports Camp): After Capture the Flag, this
Evening Entertainment is probably the most famed and popular on camp. The event
begins calmly enough with the children seeking to win tokens through a host of fun
games, but things hot up when they go to the “gunking” table to place a vote with
their hard won tokens, for the unlucky monitor, teacher or member of the
management team they want to be gunked. Being gunked is no laughing matter for
the losing staff member, as it involves two buckets full of a florescent mixture: of left
over food, mashed potato and god knows what else, being thrown on their head in
front of the whole camp. Naturally it is something no staff member wants, so voting
is always tainted with hints of corruption and conspiracy, and it always seems to
come down to the wire!
Cluedo (All Age Groups): This is an amusing competitive real life (!) version of the
famous board game. One of the staff members has been murdered and the kids
must solve the crime. There are witnesses and possible suspects hidden about the
camp, and the campers must find them and get clues out of them. It is a Colour War
game and only one team can win, so it is a race against time. When the game is
finished, there is also an amusing improvised staff re-enactment of the murder, so be
prepared for a night full of improvised comedy and entertainment.
Clash of the Titans, Colour War Basketball Matches (Played by Seniors
watched by others): These are the Saturday night post excursion big Blue/ White
clashes. The games are played in the gym between the oldest boys and girls of each
team. The whole camp is watching, everybody knows who they are, the stakes are
high, the crowd are screaming them on, lots of colour war points can be won - they
could be heroes or villains, they must play well or suffer the consequences!!
Deal or No Deal (Seniors): Based on the hit TV show which involves a presenter, a
banker, a contestant and a series of boxes of different values. (Spanish kids will
know it as ¡Allá tú!)
Disco (All age groups): This is the Friday night time for celebration, fiesta, energy
release and absolute funky, generally bad, dancing! Campers and staff will be
encouraged to take a part in the music production, so if there are any potential DJs
among you bring your CDs and MP3 players and get ready to impress your peers.
This is a night of manic dancing so be ready for it....!
Eurovision Song Contest (Juniors): This is similar to the Performance Night but
this time it’s not acting skills being displayed but singing. Again time will be given for
preparation and prizes awarded to the winners. This is the campers´ and staff’s
chance to shine and become famous, take it!
“Friends Like These” (Seniors) Is a variation of Quiz Night designed especially for
the 14-17 age group. In this game, four people, one boy and one girl from each
colour, are chosen to be the competitors. The competitors sit at the front of the
audience, separate from their team mates. A bizarre question is asked by the
monitor and the aim of the game is for their team mates to get the same answer as
the competitors, who write their answer on a hidden piece of paper. The game is
made all the more fun because of the questions; “What would you do if you found
$100 on camp? hand it in, keep it for yourself or split it with some friends”. Be
prepared to be embarrassed!
TECS - Camp Manual 65
English Summer Camp
Gala Night (Seniors in Family Camp only): Is a Senior only event which takes
place in a restaurant off site. The campers not only get to eat fine food but also must
vote for the campers they think are the “belles of the ball”…!
Halloween Night (Sophomores): Monitors dress up as witches, werewolves,
zombies, mummies, etc. The campers should be put to bed by the teachers as
usually. Then the monitors will come to each room. Scare the campers and take
them to the ¨haunted house¨ where they will play games and sing songs.
Initiative Games (All except Seniors): These begin the camp experience for the
Sophomores, Juniors and Freshmen. The games are puzzles and require team work
and level-headed thinking. Have you ever considered how to get a human body
through a half metre squared hole, one and a half metres from the ground?? Or
thought about how to direct a blind folded partner to a 5cm object twenty metres
away when you are not allowed to speak?! Fun games, great for the kids getting to
know each other, and a great way to begin camp.
Improvised Fashion Show (Seniors): This is the event where groups must form a
modelling agency team, they must have some models, designers, presenters and of
course the overall Director. They design and make the garments out of A+C material
and then their chosen models must walk elegantly down the aisle in front of the other
campers.
It’s a Knockout (All Age Groups): Is another Blue/White clash. It involves a
collection of team water games (yes you are going to get wet!) and the infamous egg
roulette encounter for the team captains: three eggs are cooked, one not – the
camper has to chose an egg, hope it’s the right one or there is a good chance they’ll
be getting egged!
Kabadi (Seniors): Is a very popular game in Bangladesh. Kabadi is played by two
teams of 12 players. A player while holding their breath, dashes into the opponent
team's area, touches some player(s) and/or wrestles out to come back home safely
without releasing his breath and thereby scores point for his team. Don’t forget the
face paint!
Kidnap (Seniors): Campers become investigators in order to find a staff member
who has been kidnapped. However they must complete a series of mental and
physical challenges in order to find where the staff member is being held hostage.
Mr. Muscle (Juniors/Seniors): Is the event where 6 hunky men compete for the
crown of Drop-dead Gorgeous Mr Muscle! There are five rounds and one contestant
is eliminated each round. It’s entertaining stuff for the crowd and stimulating, pride
building material for the contestants. “Cheer, Cheer Mr Muscle is here.”
TECS Golden Girl (Seniors): Is the slightly more cultured female version of the Mr
Muscle contest. Again there are 6 competitors and five rounds. To be crowned Miss
Universe is to be the Queen of the Camp!
Monitor Hunt (Sophomores/Juniors): It is basically a big, more organized game of
hide and seek.
Night Walk (Junior): The kids in teams of 4 to 6 will have to follow a course marked
out by rope. The course will take them through obstacles set up along the way.
TECS - Camp Manual 66
English Summer Camp
Each team member (except one who will act as the guide and give instructions in
English) will be blindfolded. Teams will be timed and points are awarded to the
fastest girls and boys teams.
Party Games (Sophomores): Games like musical chairs and limbo dancing played
by the Sophomores during their discos.
Party Theme Night (Sophomores): Is a costume themed party night for the
Sophomores. Possible themes are Halloween, Hawaii and Hippy and of course all
those who go must look the part!
Puppet Show (Sophomores): A highly entertaining, and cute, event for Sophomore
campers and staff alike. In A&C classes kids must make puppets to star in their
show, then they have got to perform the puppet show in front of the other campers.
The puppets are the stars of the show but it is the kids´ sweet voices that will make
us laugh!
Harry Potter’s Royal Rumble (Juniors) A fun night where camp is turned into
Hogwarts. Kids make costumes and then compete in authentic competitions such as
jousting and Harry’s favourite “Quidditch”. A great night for all!
Quiz Night (Juniors/ Seniors): This may sound like a light hearted evening
entertainment but when colour war points are involved, it is anything but this. Levelheaded answering is always advisable!!!
Staff/Camper Bonding COMPS (Seniors): These are the senior version of initiative
games and involves a clash between the staff and campers to see who is the most
talented. There will be arm wrestling comps, singing, “ski-racing”, basketball
shooting and much more. Just don’t let the staff down..!
Scavenger Hunt (Sophomores/Juniors): An alternative to Cluedo where the
campers must seek out information about the camp: How many flags fly from the
front gate, What nationality is Douglas? What does T.E.C.S stand for? Again it´s a
Colour War game so it is a race against time to win.
Sci-Fi Night: The idea for this evening entertainment originally stemmed from
wanting to do something similar in ways yet different to the Royal Rumble Night.
Campers participate in numerous spaced themed competitions such as Light Saber
Duels. Let’s not forget everyone will be in their space aged costumes!
Singled Out: (Seniors): This is another couple matching competition. This time,
one where categories decide the fate of the contestants: if you’re a Michael Jordan
type rather than a Beckham you might find yourself losing out, but that all depends
on the preference of the Singled Out choosers (one boy and one girl).
Treasure Hunt (Sophomores): A fun and exciting activity, where lots of yummy
sweets are wrapped in the colours blue and white and hidden around the camp. The
aim of the game is for the kids in colour war teams to find as many sweets as they
can, if they are in the blue team then they hunt for the blue sweets and vice versa for
the whites. At the end of the time limit, the teams are brought together and the team
who collected the most sweets wins and gets to eat them all and also points will be
awarded to their team in the quest for the cup. Don’t worry though the losers gain a
commiseration prize!!
TECS - Camp Manual 67
English Summer Camp
Victory Meal (All groups together): This is the last dinner on camp where the
winning Colour is treated to an exclusive meal complete with waiter service!!!!! The
meal is made all the more enjoyable by the fact that the waiters are not ordinary
waiters but actually the monitors and teachers of the losing Colour. The kids can
order them about all they want: get them to pour their water, open their ketchup
packet, brush the crumbs of their table, it is all part of being crowned the champions
of COLOUR WAR.
Water War (Sophomores and Juniors in Family Camp): The aim of the game is to
collect points in colour teams by playing games and collecting tokens (as in Casino
Night). At the end of the evening, the colour with the most tokens gets 50 points and
has the chance to throw sponges at the monitors of the losing team or the coordinator and assistant co-ordinator, whoever is most willing!
Evening Entertainment Tidy Up
Staff always have to remember that the Evening Entertainments take a lot of
organization and that there is always a lot of tidy up to be carried out after the event.
At the end of the event any staff member not assigned to putting to bed must help
with the tidy up. This includes:
• Tidying up the event area so it is same condition it was before the event.
• Returning all materials to where they camp from.
• Turning off all lights and equipment in the assigned area.
• Checking with Coordinator before going off duty.
Teachers Planning Time
Teachers will have every night to plan with their TEFL Coordinator. With the TEFL
Coordinator, they will have time to plan lessons together, share ideas and resources,
plan for special events (i.e. English Day on Family Camp) and get feedback from
observations. This is a great opportunity to pick up ideas from fellow teachers. It is
important for teachers to make use of this time!
Extra planning time (if needed) will be allocated by each TEFL Coordinator.
Putting to Bed Routine
After the excitement of the Evening Entertainments it’s time for putting the kids to
bed. This can be a stressful time for staff. It’s the end of a long day and the kids are
often on a high after the evening activity and of course it can’t be forgotten that for
many sharing a room or tent with other kids is exciting.
We recognize that this is a stressful time, but always remember kids are kids and to
all intents and purposes they are on holiday. There are of course ways of making
your job easier and below are a few pointers:
•
Escort children to their sleeping area and if they are the Juniors, or Seniors,
make sure they are being quiet in order to not wake up any other Age
Groups. It’s very frustrating as a staff member to spend ages getting your
TECS - Camp Manual 68
English Summer Camp
•
•
•
•
•
•
group of Sophomores to sleep only to have them woken by another Age
Group when they go to bed.
Sophomores have a specific time for circle games and cool down before
going to bed and also in the timetable is a time for room tidy up, organization
of clothes and prepare clothes for the next day.
Tell children to get washed, changed and ready for bed.
Allow 20-30mins of quiet chat with lights/torches on but inform them it may
only be quiet chat. Sit outside your rooms / tents monitoring so that your kids
know you are there. If needed, tell children to control noise level.
Turn out lights/torches. If you want give them a countdown it makes it more
fun and dramatic. Then sit by the door of room/tent (with tents leaving the tent
doors half open is effective way of ensuring children keep quiet). Stay there
for 10mins and then if all is quiet return to corridor/centre of camp and
continue supervision from there.
Go to bed / staff room only after all has been completely quiet for at least
20mins and or the campers are asleep. Don’t think just because they are
quiet they are asleep and you can leave. Often they are not.
You must then stay on site all night to supervise the children in case of need.
Although there are people on night watch, this doesn’t mean they take the
responsibility for your group, and this means that you have the responsibility
for ensuring they are sleeping and not acting up.
What should I do if the children won’t be quiet?
•
•
•
•
•
Threaten kids with taking them out of the room. Remember though that you
must follow through your threats if needs necessitate.
Isolate troublesome children from the group for 10mins (punishing the whole
room/tent is not usually effective). Often having them sit outside the room /
tent with you is a strange experience for them. If more than one child is acting
up, make sure they are separated from each other. Make them sit in
complete silence and tell them if they continue to make noise they will have to
sleep in another area, staff room/tent, Sophomore/Junior room. Again this is
something that they usually don’t like the idea of.
Other effective punishments are having children memorize photo boards or
timetables. Even a grammar exercise. Something boring which calms them
down and requires concentration often tires them out.
If you can not solve the problem seek the assistance of the night watch
Coordinator.
For welfare issues you can not handle, seek the assistance of the on duty
welfare person.
What not to do:
• Manhandle the children in any way (If you are so angry that you feel like
doing this, seek assistance from the night watch Coordinator). Any physical
man-handling of the children will obviously be seen as a serious issue by
management.
NOTE No physical punishments should be given to the kids i.e. running or
press ups. Experience has shown that often the line between what is
necessary and going over the top becomes blurred and the result of physical
punishments can be to provoke agitation and physical confrontation, which
clearly is not conducive to solving the problem at hand and getting the kids to
sleep.
TECS - Camp Manual 69
English Summer Camp
•
•
Leave your assigned area before the children have gone to sleep, unless
given the green light by the on duty Coordinator.
Go off site when you are assigned to looking after a leader group. Please
note, that doing so will be a negligence of duty and could be seen as a breach
of your contract.
Putting to Bed Duties: Who does what and when?
General
• Any staff member on putting to bed duties must sleep in the Leader Group
area and must stay on site all night. (This will involve Monitors and Teachers,
swapping sleeping areas when the Teacher covers for the Monitor).
• Staff members on putting to bed duty must stay on site all night, deal with any
problems the group have and then wake them up the next morning to take
them to breakfast.
• Any staff member who is not assigned to putting to bed duties must do the
evening ent tidy up and then see their Coordinator before going off duty.
• All Sophomore monitors and teachers do putting to bed duties everyday,
Monday-Thursday, but only the assigned staff members have to stay on site
all night and continue to supervise their group Those off duty can’t go off
until everything is deemed under control by the Activity Coordinator.
Monday to Thursday
• Monitors do the putting to bed duties everyday, Monday – Thursday, except
one, which their leader partner does.
• Leader partners cover for monitors and do putting to bed duties on one
assigned weekday, Monday-Wednesday. On this night the monitor is off duty
from after Evening Ent tidy up.
Friday and Saturday:
• Friday and Saturday putting to bed duties depend on the excursion
assignments. Teachers and Monitors do the same leader duties on these
days. This involves teachers sleeping in the monitor area when on duty.
Sundays:
• On Sundays, all staff are required to stay on site all night. This is to ensure
that all staff get a semi-early night in order to recharge their “batteries” and be
fresh for the challenges of the new week. Putting to bed duties will be shared
by the Monitor and Teacher but the Monitor will sleep in the sleeping area
with the campers.
Night Watch
Camp being camp and because of the 24/7 care that we offer for campers, every
night a Monitor from each Age group will be assigned to Night Watch duties on a rota
basis.7
Each week a Night Watch rota will be distributed to staff.
7
Night Watch is not done by teachers as they have to teach in the morning.
TECS - Camp Manual 70
English Summer Camp
Night Watch starts directly after putting to bed. These staff members on Night Watch
are responsible for staying up until 1.30am, or later if needed. A staff member on
night watch is not responsible for making sure all the individual leader groups are
asleep, that is the responsibility of the monitor of that particular group. The monitor
makes sure that the campers are asleep before they go off duty (they can’t leave the
campsite but they can go to the staff room or computer room), and then they hand
the responsibility over to the Night Watch person. A Night Watch person can never
leave their post. The Night Watch responsible deals with any problems that may
arise throughout the night (bear in mind that the Senior boys in particular are always
going to try to sneak out and go into the girls´ lodgings).
These people are also responsible if anything should happen in the night, i.e. if some
children are causing problems at 4am, it is these Monitors who will be woken up to
sort out the problem.
Every night there is also a Coordinator in charge of each every night.
There are differences between Night Watch and Putting to Bed, the main difference
is that the monitor responsible for the particular room/tent can not hand over their
responsibilities until all of the campers are asleep. A night watch person can never
leave their post, they can’t go to bed until the on duty Coordinator checks everything
and gives the ok.
Night Watch Folder
On finishing Night Watch, staff must complete the Night Watch folder detailing any
incidents that occurred during the night. This is especially important in ensuring that
Coordinators are able to read the folder each morning and follow up any incidents
that merit it. Night watch staff must only go off duty after it has been agreed with the
on duty Coordinator.
NOTE
On the Friday and Saturday nights before excursion no staff is specifically assigned
to Night Watch. This means that all staff on duty on each night has to be extra
vigilant with their Leader Group
Dawn Patrol
It is an unfortunate reality of camp that whilst some campers will cause trouble at
night if a Night Watch staff member is not left to supervise them, likewise some
campers may cause problems in the morning or may not support and assistance
before the official wake- up time. For this reason in each camp either 1 or sometimes
2 monitors are assigned to get up 30-45 minutes before the normal wake up time to
supervise the campers and act as port of call for help if required. Depending on the
camp, a manager will be assigned to supervise the staff member.
Please note the structure of night watch and dawn patrol differs per camp because of
different structures in each camp and different requirements the venues (i.e. some
are more spread out) and age ranges put on the camps.
TECS - Camp Manual 71
English Summer Camp
Guided Independence
Campers have certain privileges and independence which exist in no other camp
which include carrying their own mobiles, having a lot of “free time” during the day,
being able to choose (within time periods) when they go to certain meal times, being
able to hang out in their rooms, being able to bring consoles/films to camp. In short
the campers have more PERSONAL CONTROL over THEIR OWN CAMP
EXPERIENCE.
Obviously we would be foolhardy to think that without guidance the campers would
(a.) always be responsible enough when given this amount of freedom and (b.) really
appreciate, enjoy and develop as obviously it our guidance of campers (through our
camp structure, programmes and projects) which achieves all of this. Therefore this
guidance part is the management side of “guided independence” and our aim is to
achieve it through treating each camper as an INDIVIDUAL with PERSONAL
CONTROL over their own experience and through a great SIBLING LEADERSHIP
relationship with staff we aim to guide the camper to value and appreciate the
independence they have but also learn how to deal with that responsibility, working
out how to use that independence to STILL develop and learn whilst on camp.
WHAT IS ACHIEVED? The aim is for the teenagers to go home with HIGHER
RESPONSIBILITY and RESPECT levels as well of course IMPROVED ENGLISH
LEVEL. Through good guidance we have hopefully channelled their energies to
make the most of their independence and have achieved a more natural camp
experience for a teenager
Kids run their own clubs (last year a running club) and competitions (using the Wii
and also some sport competitions) during their own free time.
Campers earn and work towards privileges.
In short, the exciting thing about this project is that campers are treated as the young
adults they are in hopes of learning much more than just English throughout the
summer.
English Day
In Family, Sport, Star camp and Magic Village we have one day on each camp (i.e.
every two weeks) when we have an ‘English day’. On this day our camps aims to run
a ‘Little Village concept’ for one day, where campers should at any time speak
English, i.e. with the staff but also amongst themselves. This will be an extremely
important day, not only for the campers but also for the staff and especially for the
teachers. This is their moment of glory where they can show that they are capable of
running an English day regardless of the fact that all the other days the campers will
generally speak Spanish amongst themselves.
On the English day the time table is exactly the same as the other days, but some
sessions are adapted a little to ensure more English orientated activities. The most
important change is that the evening entertainment will include several activities that
focus entirely on the use of English and that will be run not by the Activity
Coordinator and the monitors, but by the teachers and the TEFL Coordinator.
Considering this is practically their only evening entertainment that they will run, it is
a very big event and one that requires a lot of preparation and dedication from the
TEFL team.
TECS - Camp Manual 72
English Summer Camp
Mealtimes are another moment of the day where the enforcement of English will be
very important. In order to achieve this, the teachers will be responsible for running
several language games and activities.
A&C and projects time is usually a time for the campers where they can relax a little
and where teachers and monitors are usually not very on top of the campers in terms
of their use of Spanish. During the English Day it will be VITAL that teachers use
their rewards and incentives, like they use them in their English classes, to ensure
that the campers do not speak any English at any point. It is very important that
teachers take a leading role in this as this will be a very important moment of the day
in terms of controlling their Spanish.
Sports time will be where monitors must enforce the use of English and where the
normal sports will be replaced by language competitions and games.
The English Day is a day that ALL age groups run, but they all run it separately and
some of different days, so there are no cross-age group activities. The days leading
up to the English Day will involve a lot of planning from the TEFL team’s side and
your TEFL Coordinator will tell you exactly what needs to be planned and prepared
for when.
TECS - Camp Manual 73
English Summer Camp
Chapter 6: Daily Responsibilities of Monitors and Teachers
Camp life by its very nature, as you are sure to have been told throughout the
recruitment process, needs staff to work to a structured timetable which is very much
the anti-thesis of your typical 9-5 type of job.
Given the nature of dealing with children in a foreign language and the number of
campers involved, a solid routine, where specific events run at certain times is
essential for the smooth running of the camp. Campers quickly need to get into a
schedule which they understand as become accustomed to the routine of camp life.
The nature of camp also requires pastoral care for the children on a 24 hour basis.
This means that as a staff member throughout the day different responsibilities will
be asked of you.
In carrying out these functions it is essential that you are always aware of the big
picture and your very important role in it – to provide campers with a safe,
educational and fun learning environment. This means that your input is essential no
matter what your assigned task.
The kids are here to learn not only English, but of course basic life skills and
manners (of which some may well lack on arrival). And clearly the campers are here
to have fun (it’s their summer holidays after all!!) You must always remember that
often kids learn as much outside as inside the classroom and hence no matter what
your assigned task, your skills as a native speaker and a career are essential.
Hence in every task you perform on camp you have something to contribute, be it
teaching a grammar point in class, asking a camper what sports they played today
whilst you supervise them in the showers or giving a hug to a child who is crying and
missing home.
Always remember just by being there as a reassuring presence and speaking English
to the kids, even if it is a basic, stilted conversation that doesn’t go much beyond
“How are you?” you are contributing to a child’s learning process and that has to be
good doesn’t it!!
To help you understand an average day at camp, what follows is a typical schedule
which details the specific timetable responsibilities that Monitors and Teachers have
in the Junior Age Group in Family Camp. During the training week you will be
distributed with a similar schedule specific to your Age Group. For the time being this
one acts as a good guide for you.
TECS - Camp Manual 74
English Summer Camp
Junior Monitors and Teachers (Family Camp) – Typical Daily Schedule: Monday to Friday
Time
08:30
Activity
Wake up
•
•
•
•
•
09.00
Breakfast
09.30
To Park
09.30
Break
c.11.30
Break
13.00
Monitors
Meeting
Lunch
13.30
Monitors
Wake up your leader group.
Ensure rooms are tidied for room inspection.
With your leader group check the Daily Program.
Explain the day’s activities to build up enthusiasm and to
ensure kids take correct sports equipment with them.
Ensure your leader group has EVERYTHING they need
for the day (classroom materials, relevant sports
equipment etc).
Take your leader group to breakfast as a group.
NOTE If you were off the night before these responsibilities
will be carried out by your leader group partner (normally a
teacher). You are therefore free until 13.15.
•
Sit with your leader group at breakfast
•
At end of meal ensure children stack plates in middle of
table
•
Ensure no children wander off and kids leave table as a
group
•
Wait for Age Group Coordinator to signal that you can
leave with your group.
•
Take your children as a group to the park where children
meet their teacher at relevant point
•
Wait in park until all your children have been met by their
teacher
•
Free Time until meeting with Activity Coordinator at
13.00
•
Free time
•
Meeting with Activity Coordinator
•
Ensure you are at your leader group table ready to meet
with your leader group when they come down from
class.
•
Teachers
Do any necessary preparation for class UNLESS covering for monitor in
which case you will have responsibility for getting up procedure and taking
your assigned leader group to breakfast.
•
Sit on staff table during breakfast UNLESS covering for your leader group
partner when you must sit with your group. If not covering you have no
direct responsibility for any campers, though obviously you should be
willing to help out any Monitor who appears to require assistance.
•
Ensure that you are in the park, standing by your sign ready to meet your
class
Once all kids are there take your class to your classroom. If any kids are
missing inform Camp Director.
•
•
Teach … teach …. teach !
•
Take Children to Junior eating area for 15 minute break per timetable
agreed with TEFL Coordinator.
•
It’s back to the classroom … for more teaching!
NOT APPLICABLE
•
Go to your leader group table and along with your monitor partner ensure
that table procedures are observed and children are speaking as much
English as possible.
TECS - Camp Manual 75
English Summer Camp
Time
Activity
•
•
14.00
Chill out
(Gym)
•
•
14.30
14.45
Changeover
Arts and
Crafts
Classrooms
•
•
•
Monitors
Along with your leader group partner (normally a
teacher) ensure table procedures are observed and at
end of meal table left tidy with plates stacked in the
middle.
Wait for Age Group Coordinator to signal that you can
leave with your group. Take group down to the gym for
chill out.
During chill out time supervise the kids. NOTE It is not
your chill out time as well and you are there to supervise
and ensure the kids are relaxed and having fun!.
When indicated take your leader group to the bar area to
collect your groups phones. When giving phones out to
kids tick off their name on the list so we know that it has
been given out. Kids can phone for 5-10 mins. When
finished collect phone and return it to your groups box,
ticking off the list.
Monitors, when their leader partner arrives go to the Arts
and Crafts room to collect their A&C box. They then go
and set up their classroom and wait for their leader
partner to arrive with the class
Run Arts and Crafts sessions with Teacher’s help
At end of session ensure classroom is left tidy.
NOTE Be aware that between 14.45 and 15.15 parents may
phone their children. Therefore when called some children
will leave your class to go to the calling area.
Also during Arts and Crafts sessions the IT specialist will visit
your class to see if any kids want to take money out from the
bank.
•
Teachers
Ensure table left tidy with plates stacked in the middle.
•
Take a well deserved half hour break.
•
Go the gymnasium and take over supervision of chill out and phone
supervision.
If your group has not already phoned, when indicated take your leader
group to the bar area to collect your groups phones. When giving phones
out to kids tick off their name on the list so we know that it has been given
out. Kids can phone for 5-10 mins. When finished collect phones and
return it to your groups box, ticking off the list to say the phone has been
returned.
At end of chill out ensure that any equipment is returned to the sports
cupboard in the correct bags.
Meet your leader group partner in your designated classroom.
Wait for Assistant Coordinator to indicate that you can take the kids up to
your designated Arts and Crafts class.Go to Arts and Crafts room and
collect your groups box with all your materials for the A & C class.
Ensure when your group arrive with your leader group partner you are in
the classroom ready to start the class.
Assist in running Arts and Crafts session.
•
•
•
•
•
•
NOTE Be aware that between 14.45 and 15.15 parents may phone their
children. Therefore when called some children will leave your class to go to
the calling area.
TECS - Camp Manual 76
English Summer Camp
Time
Activity
Monitors
Teachers
Also during Arts and Crafts sessions the IT specialist will visit your class to see
if any kids want to take money out from the bank.
Changeover
to Sports
Activities
•
16.05
17.30
Break
Tea /
Merienda
18.00
16.00
•
•
Return your groups Arts and Crafts box to A & C room, ensuring
everything has been cleaned properly by the kids.
Note on the control sheet (stuck to your box) exactly what activity you
intend to cover in the next days Arts and Crafts session and any specific
materials you will require.
NOT APPLICABLE
•
Take kids to Junior Canteen for Merienda.
•
Supervise kids during this time and ensure area is left
clean and tidy!
•
•
Free time until shower supervision
Free Time
Sports
Session 2
•
Run your assigned sport / activity.
•
Free time
19.00
Sports
Session 3
•
Run your assigned sport / activity.
•
Free time
20.00
Showers
•
•
Back on duty sharp ready to supervise children in assigned areas whilst
they shower.
20.45
To Dinner
•
•
With leader group partner take your group together to dinner.
20.45
Dinner
•
•
21.15
Leader
Bonding
•
Take your sports group back to Residence / Campsite.
You now have 30 minutes to relax and shower yourself
but you MUST be ready at 20.30 to help form up your
leader group with your leader partner and take them
down to dinner at 20.45.
With leader group partner take your group together to
dinner
Sit with your leader group and responsibilities as per
lunch together with leader group partner.
With your leader group partner find an area in the park /
football pistas. During the next half hour play games
with your group. The idea is that you bond with your
leader group, therefore you must keep your group
separate from the other groups.
Sit with your leader group and responsibilities as per lunch together with
leader group partner.
Meeting with TEFL Coordinator
•
Take your children to their first sports session per sports
timetable.
Non multi activity kids must be taken to the relevant
meeting point – Sailors : Front lawn ; Tennis and Horse
Riding : Bus Park ; Music : The Nest
•
TECS - Camp Manual 77
English Summer Camp
Time
21.45
Activity
Evening Ent
c. 23.00 Bed
time/Night
watch
•
•
Monitors
Enthusiasm, participation, energy, energy, energy. We
want to get the campers excited, engaged, and involved.
IF ON (GENERAL): Take children to bed and actively
supervise until they are quiet and in bed. Once your
leader group are quiet and sleeping you are free to go
to the staffroom / computer room after checking in with
on duty Coordinator. (unless on night watch duty!).
However you MUST stay onsite in case there are any
problems with your kids.
NOTE All on duty staff must be back in their rooms by 1.30
am or when night duty finishes (whichever is earlier).
•
•
•
•
•
Teachers
Planning time / resource development with other teachers and TEFL
Coordinator
IF OFF: clean up after Evening Ent and see Coordinator before going off
site (if you want to of course!).
IF ON AND COVERING FOR LEADER GROUP PARTNER: Take
children- to bed and actively supervise until they are quiet and in bed.
You MUST stay on site and supervise assigned leader group (which will
INCLUDE taking on monitor´s leader group role the next morning in
getting the leader group out of bed and supervising at breakfast) the next
morning.
NOTE If on you will swap beds with your leader partner as you are
responsible for the leader group during this time.
IF ON NIGHT WATCH DUTY: Fulfill your leader group
duties regarding putting your group to bed and thereafter
carryout night watch duties in assigned area until 1.30
am or later if required.
IF OFF: Clean up after Evening Ent and see Coordinator
before going off site.
NOTE If off you will swap beds with your leader partner so
that you don´t disturb the children should you return late.
TECS - Camp Manual 78
English Summer Camp
Information on Staff Time Off
***The below is a guideline and whilst the majority of the time off will be exactly as
mentioned below, because pre-camp set up and camp life in general involves many
unexpected changes, TECS does reserve the right to alter it as needs require.***
Days on camp whilst being fun filled are of course long. Therefore it is essential you are
aware exactly when you have time off to recharge your batteries.
Please note that these times are subject to change with the dynamics of the camp.
Monday-Friday Daily Time Off
Monitors
Family Camp
Time off for Monitors begins after the children head up to class.
Monitors must return to work at the following times:
*Monitors must be on time for meeting with Activity Coordinator Monday-Thursday.
Sophomore: 12.30
Juniors:
13.00
Seniors:
13.30
On Friday the excursion/departure meeting with the Director will be from 10.00-10.30 (ALL
age groups). Time-off starts after the meeting and lasts until lunch.
Sport Camp
Time off for Junior Monitors begins after the junior campers head up to class.
Junior monitors must return to work at the following times: 13.00
Time off for Senior Monitors begins after the senior campers head up to class.
Senior monitors must return to work at the following times: 19.45
Star Camp
Time off for Monitors begins after the children head up to class.
Monitors must return to work at the following times: 14.00
*Monitors must be on time for meeting with Activity Coordinator Monday-Friday from 14.0014.30.
Little Village
79
English Summer Camp
Time off for Monitors begins after the children head up to class.
Anglo monitors must return to work at the following times: 13.30
*Monitors must be on time for meeting with Activity Coordinator Monday-Friday from 13.3014.00.
Magic Village
Time off for Monitors begins after the children head up to class.
Monitors must return to work at the following times: 13.00
Note when a Monitor returns to work at this time they must have everything they will need for
the rest of the day (i.e. lists, trainers for sports, swim wear, pens).
Go Camp
Time off for Monitors who are not on the morning shift begins after the children head up to
class. During this time the campers are in English class.
Monitors must return to work at the following times: 11.30
Monitors not on the afternoon shift have free time from 15.30-18.30.
Monitors also have 30 minutes off in the evening:
Family Camp
Sophomores: 20.30-21.00
Juniors:
20.00-20.30
Seniors:
20.30-21.00
Star
20.00-20.30 (half of monitors)
20.30-21.00 (other half of monitors)
Little Village
14.30-15.00 (half of monitors)
21.45-22.15 (other half of monitors)
Magic Village
20.00-20.30
Sports Camp
Juniors: 20.15-20.45
Seniors: 14.35-15.05
Go Camp
Not applicable
NOTE Monitors / Assistant Monitors who act as Leader Partners will take their 30 minutes
breaks at the same time as the Teachers NOT as the Monitors.
Remember: It is essential that you are back sharp at the stated times as if you are not
then other people have to cover for you, which is obviously not fair.
80
English Summer Camp
Teachers
Family Camp
Teachers have off from when the campers go off to sports sessions until:
Sophomore: 20.00 (meet children at leader group table in dinning area)
Juniors:
20.00 (meet children at leader group sleeping area)
Seniors:
20.30 (meet children at leader group sleeping area)
In Family Camp, teachers have their daily meeting with their TEFL Co-ordinator before
planning time in the evening Monday – Friday. On Fridays have the Excursions/Departures
meeting with the Director is at 16.00 and off begins after the meeting.
Sports Camp
Juniors: 16.05-20.00 (19.45 on Fridays for Excursion/ Departures meeting)
Seniors: If not on morning supervision, off until 13.30 (13.00 on Fridays for Excursion/
Departures meeting). If on morning supervision, must supervise morning routine
until kids go off to activities, then off until above time.
Star Camp
Teachers have off from when the campers go off to sports sessions until:
19.00 (meet with TEFL Coordinator)
Little Village
Teachers have off from when the campers go off to sports sessions until: 19.00 (meet with
TEFL Coordinator)
Magic Village
Teachers have off from after Chill out supervision until: 18:15 (meet with TEFL Coordinator)
Go Camp
Teachers have off from 19.00 to be used for free time or lesson planning.
Some teachers also have 30 minutes off in the afternoon:
Family Camp
Sophomores:
Juniors:
Seniors:
13.40-14.10
14.00-14.30
N/A (more time
off in afternoon)
Sport Camp
Juniors: 14.20-14.50
Star Camp
11.45-12.15 (half the teachers)
12.15-12.45 (other half of the teachers)
Go Camp
15.00-15.30
Remember: It is essential that you are back sharp at the stated times as if you are not then other people have to cover
for you, which is obviously not fair.
81
English Summer Camp
Teacher Professionalism
When teachers are not on putting to bed duty, they are permitted to go off site at night.
However it is important to realize the negative effects going off site can have on a teacher’s
role on camp. 2am is the recommended time that teachers should be on site during the
week to get a proper night´s sleep before teaching their morning class.
Teachers whose class quality and professionalism is compromised as a result of frequently
going out late at night, disciplinary actions will be taken. Teaching is the priority of teachers
and they need to deliver a quality class. If this becomes an issue, teachers will first speak
with the TEFL Coord and if it continues, a meeting will be had with the TEFL Coord and
director.
Teachers must be fit for work i.e., up and dressed on time, the class is prepared and
executed with a level of enthusiasm and organization, and the teacher must not smell of
alcohol or be under any influence of alcohol. Extreme cases should be dealt with on an
individual basis.
Monitors Nights / Mornings Off
Each week on an assigned day from Monday to Wednesday each Monitor and Assistant
Monitor will have one night / morning off. This is designed to compensate for the fact that
during camp they will be asked to stay up late at times performing Night Watch duty. On
their night off staff can go off site if they wish.
The night off starts from the end of Evening Entertainment tidy up for Juniors and Seniors
and after putting to bed for Sophomores. You must see your Coordinator before going off.
On a Monitors night / morning off the monitors leader partner will cover the Monitor’s
responsibilities with regard to putting the Leader Group to bed and getting them up in the
morning and sitting with them at breakfast.
In order to this the Monitor and Leader Partner will change sleeping quarters for this night as
the Leader Partner has responsibility for the children throughout the night.
After a night off monitors do not need to perform wake up duties, supervise breakfast or
attend the morning meeting.
They return to work for the morning meeting with the Activity Coordinator.
Days Off
Excursions Weekends: Weekends of Weeks 1, 3, 5 and 7
On Excursion weekends each staff member will have a day off.
With each excursion specifics will be explained to you regarding exactly the times involved.
Essentially though what happens is that those not going on the Saturday excursion will be off
from the Evening Entertainment on Friday until the kids return from the Excursion on
Saturday night. Those returning from the Excursion will be off duty from approximately their
return until Sunday night when that days Excursion returns.
82
English Summer Camp
Arrivals and Departure Weekends: Weekend of Weeks 2, 4, 6 and 8.
Time off will begin at the end of Departure Duties (therefore the quicker and more efficiently
we do these the better!) and staff are required to be back at work at approximately11.30 for
the pre arrivals camp general staff meeting on the Sunday (the exact time will be
communicated to you).
El Bosque / Campano Excursion Staff:
The excursions ‘The Weekend in the Mountains’ and “Weekend at Campano” are on the
Saturday and Sunday of weekends 2 and 6 for our 4 week campers. Monitors (not teachers)
will be assigned to this duty. These staff members will be developed into a rota system so
that they receive a day off during the week (Monday to Friday).
Every staff member is expected to stay on site every Sunday to allow everyone to rest up for
the up coming week.
Extra Time Off
Coordinators have a certain amount of time that they are allowed to give off to staff as
bonuses for good work. This time is not written in to the contract and is therefore not
guaranteed or shared equally among staff. It is instead an incentive for staff to work hard
and keep up performance levels throughout camp.
Each week one Staff Member in every Age Group will be selected by their Co-ordinators as
“Staff Member of the Week” to reflect the extra special work they have done that week. This
person will be presented with a certificate in front of the children and granted extra time off.
** Hence staff who work hard and show a positive attitude will be granted extra time
off**
83
English Summer Camp
Chapter 7: Communicating with Foreign Language Children
Introduction
At TECS we aim to offer children a total immersion English environment in which to learn.
This involves all activities being conducted in English. Coordinators and Directors may
speak Spanish in extreme welfare situations or where safety necessities it.8
Communicating with campers, many of whom have a low English level, can be stressful for
both staff members and campers. The success of the camps as a language learning
environment depends on staff members using good communication skills to get their
message across.
As a staff member, during the camp, you will learn so much about language and
communication and be amazed at how much you can get across even to the lowest level
students. However this will only happen if you use some simple, but very effective
techniques. Therefore it is essential that you give a lot of thought to the following!
Important:
The coordinators, especially TEFL Coordinators will be very aware of the promotion of
English on camp and be there to support you if you need help or ideas. Remember, even if
you don´t hold a TEFL teacher post on camp, you still are a vital part of the English teaching
team. Every time you communicate with the camper in English and encourage and reward
their efforts in English, you are helping them learn and improve!
Tips to Make Communication Easier and Encourage More English
•
Speak much, much slower than you would to a native English speaker.
•
Speak clearly and emphasize key words, i.e. Do you have your books?
•
Build up a natural rapport with the students.
and tell them about yours.
•
Continually engage students in all areas of camp (meal times, chill out times, sports,
class, excursions, evening entertainment, etc.).
Don’t form groups of
monitors/teachers when you are with the campers.
•
If students do not understand the first time, try to think of an easier way of saying it.
Try always to use simple English and not colloquial, i.e. if students do not understand
“fancy” use “do you want”.
•
Also try to think which words could be complicated and how could they be simplified,
i.e. “pack up your things” can easily be substituted for “Finish class. Put your book in
your bags”. There is no harm in using the colloquial or more complex words first time
around (indeed it is good for campers’ vocabulary to be exposed to real life English)
Ask about their hobbies, interests, etc.
8
Inevitably the kids outside the classroom will tend to speak Spanish to each other (except in Little
Village). Therefore it is essential they ALWAYS communicate with staff in English to maximise their
learning opportunities.
84
English Summer Camp
but if the campers don’t understand you, you will need to think of how you can
simplify what you want to say.
•
Persevere and do not give up explaining. Don’t resort to Spanish just because it is
easier. Doing so defeats the purpose as the kids will simply not listen to the English
and just wait to hear the translation. Using Spanish undermines the effort made by
other staff members to communicate in English. Speaking in Spanish does not help
the campers achieve their English goals.
•
Be an Italian and use those hands. Don’t be afraid. You can never gesticulate too
much! Develop your own international sign language! Demonstrations can me used
at any time of the day (class, meal times, sports, Evening Ents).
•
Be patient, it will hardly ever be the case that a camper does not want to understand,
so recognise that it is not easy and encourage them. Use positive reinforcement and
incentives.
•
When speaking to children in their second language it is essential you have their full
attention always. Therefore it is a good idea to establish some way of signalling to
the kids that you are about to say something important. Common ways are clapping
your hands or raising an arm but if you think of something original and unique all the
better.
•
Be energetic and charismatic when explaining something. Nearly always the more
energetic your explanation, the more the campers will pay attention to you and want
to understand.
•
Use realia and be prepared to be an actor. If you are explaining “put your book in
your bag”, find a bag and act out the action of putting books into the bag.
•
Use stronger kids in the group to help explain activities (in English). They find this
empowering and often have the ability to reduce your explanation to the simple
basics that other students require.
•
Reward campers for their English efforts. Give them the colour war point’s cards (see
Colour Point’s list “showing the card”) and praise them every time they try. The more
the campers want to speak English, the more they will. It is a very good idea to
make up your own individual ways of rewarding campers who speak good
English, things like star charts usually work very well in class.
•
Reprimand, gently, campers who never try to speak English. Try to show them how
to communicate with you and try to demonstrate that it is possible for them to get their
message across with the English they know.
•
And always remember that if a kid doesn’t understand it doesn’t mean they are
stupid. Unfortunately it probably means that you haven’t explained yourself very well!
Try a different approach, and as said before, don’t give up!
85
English Summer Camp
The Use of Spanish on Camp
On camp we must never lose sight of the reasons why kids come to camp – to learn English!
Clearly there is a lot of fun to be had along the way but at the end of the day we must always
recognise that we are a language camp and each of us has an important role to fulfil in
developing our campers` English.
For this reason TECS summer camps are full immersion English language activity camps,
meaning that all our staff are native English speakers9 and all our activities are led through
English.
Our objective is for the children to learn English in the most enjoyable way possible. Our
methodology maximises the exposure they have to the English language and aims to
empower the child as a language learner as they realise they understand and can
communicate more than they initially thought.
Therefore, except in serious welfare, discipline or safety situations, (see below for notes on
these) staff must not speak Spanish to the campers.
Our policy on the use of Spanish is as follows:
•
English is the only language for explaining things. If students do not understand, it is
important to persist in English and it is not okay to switch into Spanish to make things
easier for yourself and the camper.
•
It is important to note that on a language camp, unless something concerns safety,
the most important thing is that the students are being exposed to English rather than
understanding everything. It is a reality that they are not going to always understand
everything so you must exercise perseverance in the use of English and patience
when the campers have problems understanding.
•
The use of written Spanish to speed up comprehension can be used in English class,
if it involves something similar to the following, cuando=when, donde=where etc. The
use of written Spanish should not be followed by explanations in spoken Spanish or
by permitting the students to ask you questions in Spanish.
•
It is inevitable that if the campers know you understand Spanish, they will begin to
speak to you in this language. Therefore it is important that if this situation arises that
you do not allow the students to continue to communicate with you in Spanish. You
should ask them to ask you again in English and you should definitely not get in the
habit of responding to the questions they ask you in Spanish, because once this
means of communication is established it is impossible to break it.
NOTE Obviously with most of our youngest Sophomores, it is likely that they are not
going to be able to communicate much in English so it is inevitable that they will continue
to speak Spanish to you. In this situation, staff members should continue to encourage
9
Bar key staff such as the Assistant Director and Welfare Coordinators who nonetheless must always
communicate with the campers in English unless the situation is serious enough to merit the use of
Spanish.
86
English Summer Camp
the use of English and continue to communicate always in English themselves but also
obviously recognise that many of our youngest campers have very limited English.
•
Staff members must avoid getting into the habit of using Spanish phrases like
“vamos” and “venga”, it is important to recognise that the campers should be hearing
the English equivalents “lets go” and “come on” continuously in order to get into the
natural habit of using them themselves.
•
Although we are a full immersion camp, except in the classroom, we do not force our
campers to speak English to each other, but instead encourage that they do so as
much as possible, especially during organised activities. Because of this reality (that
the campers will speak Spanish to each other) it is essential that they speak only
English with the staff in order to maximise their language learning opportunities.
NOTE To maximise the English spoken, we do have high staff to camper ratios. At times
you may feel that we do not need all the staff to run and organise an activity but we ask
that you remember that for all of us, our principal role on camp is to communicate in
English with the campers and therefore if you are not directly involved in the organisation
or running of an activity you still have an important role to fulfil in speaking and
communicating with the children in English.
Use of Spanish in Welfare, Discipline and Safety
Obviously it is a reality that to ensure the happiness, good behaviour and safety of our
campers the campers’ first language, Spanish, is going to have a small role. Firstly,
however, it is important to recognise that the role Spanish plays is much smaller than that of
English in all the above mentioned areas. For example most campers who miss home do
not need to be talked to in Spanish, they instead need you as their leader to show them you
care, by taking time out to speak to them, cuddle them, pat them on the back etc. In general
letting them know you are there for them combined with a little personal, special attention is
the most successful way of dealing with welfare problems and this of course can all be
achieved without the use of Spanish.
Likewise with discipline, if you outline to the camper on day one what is expected (see
camper rules) and use the communication tips outlined above, you will find you can nip most
potential discipline problems in the bud before they happen. Issues concerning safety can
also nearly always be explained in English, using lots of repetition and physical examples of
what is not allowed.
The role Spanish plays in the three areas of Welfare, Discipline and Safety is therefore one
merely of reinforcement and support. Each Age Group has a Welfare Responsible (a
Spanish person with a high level of English) whose principal job is to provide reinforcement
and support in these three areas when needed.
For example, if despite all your efforts you can not get a camper to stop crying or to behave
properly, it is at this point the Welfare Coordinator will intervene and talk to the camper in
Spanish to provide the child, and indeed the staff member, the support they need. Of course
when a Welfare Monitor comes in to support the child, it is important to recognise that the
role of the leader, supporting and disciplining the child in English, does not stop, but in fact
continues on a larger scale than before. Most management personnel are also Spanish
speakers.
87
English Summer Camp
If a staff member is a Spanish speaker themselves, it is okay for them to provide some
welfare support or discipline in Spanish but there are important things to consider in this
situation:
• If the problem is significant, the Welfare Responsible should still be informed
regardless of whether the leader feels able to deal with it on their own.
• Secondly any communication in Spanish must be done on an isolated one to one
basis with the camper and should only be done to deal with big problems, or to
stop a medium-sized problem becoming bigger.
• Thirdly any future communication, which does not relate to the issue, must be
carried out in English with this camper.
Significantly the Welfare Monitor must also communicate with the children in English unless
the welfare situation merits the use of English. This means that Welfare Monitors must not
be seen by kids as an easy touch and kids must be stopped from seeking the help of the
Welfare Monitor whenever they have a small problem, such as they can’t find their towel.
The Monitor / Teacher is and always will be the person responsible for dealing with these
situations.
The Total English Experience
Total English philosophy at the Little Village camp means that the major focus of the
campers´ learning experience will be communicative and be conducted largely without paper
or grammar. The students attending the Little Village have been ´vouched for´ by their
school teachers as to having an Intermediate level of English or above. The students have
pledged to speak ONLY English for the duration of the camp (2 weeks), even amongst
themselves. Therefore, the staff working at Little Village will have a different educational
environment to operate in than the staff working at TECS other camps which major factor
being that campers MUST speak English amongst themselves and use English only
throughout their stay on camp. Students will challenge themselves and become more
comfortable and confident in speaking English.
Use of Spanish in Go Camp
Indeed a unique feature of this camp is that it is the only TECS camp which runs with our
staff using a mixture of English and Spanish, a fact that is brought home clearly to the
campers by what colour t-shirt the staff are wearing: Red = English time and White= Spanish
time. The theory of this camp is that it be a stepping stone into the demanding world of full
immersion English learning as not every camper is ready to be looked after by a monitor who
can only communicate with them in English. For this reason we place a massive importance
on this camp on welfare care with the staff’s primary objective to ensure correct integration
into the camp and to ensure welfare care is always at hand whenever and however needed.
The parents are also allowed a closer contact to the campers in this camp which is achieved
through the mid-camp parents’ day and the fact that monitors provide parents with a midcamp report on how their child is getting on camp. Also in some cases, this is the only camp
where parents can actually speak to the monitors directly as in other camps this is controlled
by Spanish welfare staff for obvious language reasons.
88
English Summer Camp
Chapter 8: Camp Rules
Introduction
In order to make camp, clearly it is necessary to have a set of rules and regulations that we
all abide by. It is important you familiarise yourself with them to avoid any misunderstanding
either on your part or on the part of a camper. As they old saying goes it really is important
that we are all “singing from the same hymn sheet!”
Staff Code of Conduct
By agreeing to work at TECS you have agreed to follow our Code of Conduct. These rules
are all common sense and exist to ensure a safe, educational learning base for children and
a co-operative environment for staff.
Therefore staff must be aware that the following situations will be viewed by TECS summer
camp as breaches of contract and will result in appropriate disciplinary action, and could
result in the termination of a staff member’s contract.
1. Being unfit for work because of alcohol indulgence.
2. Repeatedly being late for work without adequate explanation.
3. Having any form of physical relationship with a camper or crew member (camp
helper).
4. Any form of sexual activity, or inappropriate activity for a children’s environment,
anywhere on the camp facilities.
5. The skipping of duties without given justification.
6. A repeated failure to do what is asked of you.
7. Consumption of any controlled substance (non-prescription drugs).
8. Drinking or Smoking in front of the children (working and non-working time).
The smoking staff areas are the only designated smoking areas and smoking inside
tents, for obvious fire risk reasons, is absolutely forbidden. Consuming alcohol on the
camp facilities is not permitted in any area.
The drinking of any alcohol at any point during working time is not permitted, including
when off site, while at the beach or on an excursion, even if it is just one beer (this is for
obvious legal reasons and because one beer rarely is just one!).
9. Going off site when responsible for night time supervision of campers.
10. The inappropriate use of Spanish (see General Manual for a guideline on this) will not
be permitted by anyone bar the Spanish Speaking Nurse of Spanish Support Staff.
Staff should speak English between themselves at all times during working time. All
staff, including native Spanish Welfares and Crew Members, should note that
because of the obvious need to maintain a maximum English exposure for the
campers that frequent unnecessary use of Spanish (i.e. for reasons that are not
89
English Summer Camp
serious welfare or discipline issues) with campers will potentially be viewed by TECS
as a cause for dismissal.
TECS requires all staff to adhere to the following list of rules (in addition to the more serious
ones mentioned above) and not doing so may result in disciplinary action and affect the
employee’s reference.
1. Footwear must be worn at all times. Going bare foot is not permitted. Sandals may
not be worn during sports sessions or any time when injury to the toes could take
place.
2. The correct Camp uniform must be worn at all times while working. It is not permitted
to wear the camper t-shirt in the place of a staff shirt nor is it permitted to alter, cut up,
or paint the camp uniform in any way.
3. TECS like any educational organisation has certain dress/appearance code
requirements. These do not exist to discriminate against the appearance of any
individual, but rather, as in the case of any educational authority, provide a standard
environment which avoids influencing children in any way. Obviously these
regulations apply to only work time, although staff should be aware that TECS sees
staff training week as fitting into work time. These dress and appearance codes are
in line with Spanish law and follow the standards set out by the Spansih state school
system.
a. Staff are expected to appear well groomed and tidy during all work time and of
an image that parents would expect of someone who looks after their children.
i. TECS remains the right to request that staff members remove/ change
certain appearance factors which do not fit with the image that parents
expect.
b. TECS reserves the right to ask any staff member to cover up any tattoo which
is deemed inappropriate for a children´s environment. This would include any
tattoo with sexual innuendos or inappropriate language.
c. Our rules on piercings are the following:
i. Excessive (in size or appearance) piercings cannot be worn during
work time by any individual regardless of gender. We reserve the right
to define what is excessive and a staff member signing this contract is
accepting the fact.
ii. Females are permitted to wear small earrings/studs during work time,
but will be asked to avoid wearing large or long dangling earrings that
could cause danger during actives activities on camp.
iii. Females are permitted to wear very small nose studs as long as the
number of them is not excessive and the appearance of them is
appropriate when working with children.
iv. Males are not permitted to wearing earrings/studs or any facial
piercings during work time.
v. Eyebrow rings/studs and certain large nose, tongue rings and earrings
are not permitted by any staff and will be asked to remove during work
time.
vi. Belly button piercings are permitted to be worn on beach excursions or
during swimming pool classes as long as they are small and
appropriate for a children´s summer camp and do not cause any
danger (possible cuts, snags, scratches, etc.) to other people whilst
doing activities in the pool.
90
English Summer Camp
d. TECS asks all staff to bear in mind that although all the above is controlled
with contracted TECS staff members to provide a standard norm acceptable
to parents from a variety of backgrounds, we do not apply the same
regulations to the campers as we understandably see this as a prerogative
and zone of the parent.
e. Please note TECS will not accept the excuse that piercing holes will fill up and
this is something the contracted staff member must bear in mind and plan for
before coming to camp.
4. Staff can not go bare-topped (without t-shirt) anywhere on the camp facilities (except
the swimming pools) while children are present on the camp, this includes nonworking time.
5. Unless there is a specific work reason, staff may not go down the corridors, or into
the rooms, of the opposite sex. (This is because young children can very easily
misinterpret situations).
6. Staff must enforce all the Camp Rules (as per manual) upon their leader group
children at all times and can not turn a blind eye to the breaking of any of them.
a. This includes supervising that elder campers in relationships act in an
acceptable way at all times.
7. Staff who are in relationships can not show inappropriate physical affection towards
each other at any time, working or non-working, in front of the children. This includes
actions such as: kissing, excessive hugging, innuendo etc…
8. Guests, non-camp workers, are not permitted to sleep on the camp facilities at any
time and are only permitted on the camp facilities during the day, if the Camp Director
has given permission.
9. Staff are only permitted in the swimming pool during the set open times (if unsure
about these a management staff member must be consulted). Swimming at night for
safety reasons is forbidden.
10. Staff can not receive non-emergency phone calls during working time and must not
use non-work mobiles during working time. (If a non-emergency call is received on
the camp mainline during working time, a message will be taken).
11. Alcohol is not permitted to be stored on the camp facilities.
12. Staff may not use the office phones for making outgoing calls and can only use them
for receiving calls if agreed with the Camp Director (the pay phones can be used with
most phone cards and can also receive calls). Work mobile phones can not be used
for personal use unless agreed otherwise with the Camp Director. Phone bills are
checked weekly.
13. Staff must keep their own sleeping areas appropriately tidy as an example to the
campers. Checks will be done every so often and staff members with untidy rooms
will be asked to tidy them.
14. Staff members who smoke must accept that a reality of camp is that smoking (in the
smoking area on camp) can only be done during non work time.
91
English Summer Camp
Campers’ Rules
Below is a list of rules you should make sure your campers are aware of and are always
obeying. On the arrivals Sunday, those rules relevant to the Age Group will be introduced in
English and Spanish to all campers by the Welfare Monitors. (i.e no smoking or drinking
alcohol is not relevant to Sophomores).
All staff members must be aware of the rules and take time to individually remind their
groups of the rules. Campers must remember:
1. Respect others and always be polite
2. Respect other people’s property. Never borrow anything without asking first.
3. Always respect their monitor/teacher and listen to all they say and obey what is asked
of them.
4. Always be with their Leader or Teacher – Don’t go off alone without permission.
5. Walk.....DO NOT run in the corridors.
6. No entry to the pool without your leader/teacher.
7. No food in the tents or in the dorms.
8. No swearing.
9. No smoking or alcohol.
10. No dropping rubbish anywhere
11. No mobile phones (except in Sport Camp).
12. After “putting to bed” only allowed in own tent or room.
13. No entry to the sleeping areas of campers of the other sex.
14. No entry to sleeping areas, except during morning and night routine or shower time.
15. No entry to staff areas.
16. Always speak in English with staff´, except in serious welfare cases when they should
talk to the Welfare Monitor.
17. No wet clothing to be left inside a tent/room and all clothing should be dried outside
before being put in the laundry basket. We don’t want smelly rooms!
18. If you have any complaint, speak with your monitor or teacher.
19. No ¨smooching heavily¨ and leaving ´love bites.´ The campers all have different
maturity levels. Spanish parents are generally conservative and do not like to see
92
English Summer Camp
´love bites´ on their children’s necks when they return home from camp. If a staff
member notices anything of the sort, the child must be talked to and a phone call may
be made home. This kind of behaviour is not tolerated, and staff must intervene.
It is important to introduce these rules to your campers on the first day, and to add some of
your own if necessary, in order to make the children know from day one that there are things
they cannot do and will be punished for if they do. Introducing the rules to the older campers
is obviously very important but doing so to some degree with the Sophomores will also be
beneficial. You should also make children aware of the discipline and welfare procedures10.
NOTE See the appendix for a copy of the rules in Spanish which can be used if it is
necessary to clarify a point with a child.
Discipline Procedure
Knowing correctly how to deal with discipline problems with an English speaking child can be
difficult, and obviously coping with such situations on a language Summer Camp, where staff
and campers have different first languages, is even trickier.
The following discipline procedure is designed to both nip problems in the bud before they
become serious and to punish serious misbehavior. It is the procedure that should be
followed by all staff and it is important that they are aware of it.
Stage 1
Situation: A child is being unruly and is disrupting an activity.
Action: Take the child aside and make clear to them the disruption they are causing (often
energetic children are unaware when they are behaving badly). Tell them firmly that this sort
of behavior is not to be repeated. If appropriate, threaten them with punishment chores
(mentioned in stage 3).
Stage 2
Situation: The same child is continuing to cause problems despite your warning.
Action: Again take the child aside, and this time make clear that their continued misbehavior
will be punished with the following: A) they will be taken to the Coordinator. And (B) the
Coordinator will implement one of the punishment chores.
Stage 3
Situation: Despite all your warnings the child has paid no heed and still he/she is being
disruptive.
Action: Child is taken immediately to Coordinator or Coordinator is called over loud speaker
(depends on whether there are other staff members with you). Coordinator implements one
of the following punishment chores (more can be made up but must be okayed with the
Coordinator):
10
Child is put on litter pick duty for a day.
All kids before arriving at camp are sent a circular containing all these rules.
93
English Summer Camp
-
Child is assigned to help a management staff member with a set task
Coordinator also, if appropriate, threatens with banning from certain activities (list follows in
Stage 4).
At this stage the Welfare Monitor should also be called upon to have a quiet chat with
the child in Spanish to clarify that the child has understood why they have been
punished and to make clear to the child that we will not permit further bad behavior.
The result of the conversation should be documented on the welfare and discipline
sheets.
Stage 4
Situation: Despite implementation of punishment chores, child continues to misbehave.
Action: Child is taken by Coordinator to Camp Director or Assistant Director and the following
actions, as appropriate, are taken:
(1) Child is banned from one of the following activities:
•
•
•
An Evening Entertainment (the favorites like Barbeques and Capture the Flag
are often effective ones) and spends the evening with another Age Group. (A
decision will need to be made whether the parents need to be informed, as
usually it is better we inform the parents of the disciplinary action rather than
the child involving them).
A trip to the beach, child is kept on camp in the presence of monitors looking
after the little children.
In very severe cases: an excursion.
(2) The child is told that any future bad behavior will be followed not only by immediate
implementation of (1) but also by a phone call to their parents to inform them of the child’s
bad behavior.
Spanish children are often very afraid of their parents finding out that they have been
misbehaving.
Stage 5
Situation: (this stage is rarely reached). Despite everything the child continues to cause
problems.
Action: Child is taken immediately to Camp Director or Camp Secretary, or they are called
over loud speaker as appropriate. The child is immediately banned from the current activity
and from the evening entertainment and a phone call is made to the child’s parents informing
them of the child’s bad behavior. The child and the parents are told that if the child continues
to cause problems he/she will be expelled from the camp.
Stage 6
Situation: Child refuses to improve behavior.
94
English Summer Camp
Action: Decision is taken by Director of Language Camps and TECS General Manager to
expel the child from the camp.
NOTE Obviously there will be occasions when a child who has caused no problems before
does one particularly bad thing, like hitting another child. In these cases certain stages are
missed out as appropriate. For instance in the example above, stage 3 or 4 would be
implemented immediately.
Summary of Discipline Procedure
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Take child aside and tell firmly that their bad behavior will not be tolerated.
Child taken to Coordinator.
Punishment chores implemented.
Welfare person is called upon to chat with child.
Child taken to Camp Director or Camp Secretary and banned from some
activities.
6. Parents of child are contacted.
7. Child is sent home.
NOTE The campers may know the above procedure as “three strikes and out”. For the
children the three strikes are:
•
•
•
STRIKE 1: Monitor talks to child and hands out a small punishment.
STRIKE 2: Coordinator or Welfare speak with child and a larger punishment is set.
STRIKE 3: One of the Directors talks with child and communicates the issue to child’s
parents and a more significant punishment is set.
Appropriate Punishments
Absolutely NO physical or psychological punishments are tolerated at a TECS Camp.
Dealing with campers´ behaviour can be difficult, but staff must appropriately deal with every
situation and try to turn it into an educational lesson.
There are three major characteristics of effective staff when reprimanding students:
œ Effective staff have an idea about where the behaviour comes from or what caused it
œ Effective staff understand that no individual can control another (even though we
often try to!)
œ Effective staff are in control of themselves when dealing with that behaviour.
The consequence must always reflect the offence. If a camper is being disruptive at meal
times and does not listen to staff, give that camper responsibility at meal times such as
cleaning the table or ensuring that all campers are speaking English at the table. After a
successful punishment, give the camper positive reinforcement so that they get back on the
right track and do not feel demotivated.
95
English Summer Camp
Chapter 9: Camp Procedures
Mobile Phones and Camper Phone Call Times
During camp, Spanish kids are very keen to keep in contact with their parents. Spanish
culture is very family orientated and kids and parents alike have an expectation on being able
to be in regular contact with their children. At times some kids can become unsettled by
speaking to their parents. Often immersed in the activities they have little time to think of
home, but suddenly a quick phone call can lead to floods of tears as they are reminded of
Mummy and Daddy and home. Hence we work hard at TECS to create a phone policy that
balances the cultural aspects of Spanish families against the well being of the campers and
the need to operate a programme for over 200 campers.
In this respect phone call times are strictly restricted. During phone call times the Welfare
Monitors have an extra responsibility to deal with upset children and if need be to speak to
parents. Other staff though must provide support for the children as required (they should
not though speak to parents on the phone - only the Welfare Monitor should do this).
Mobile Phones on Family Camp
When campers arrive at camp they must hand in their mobile phones (except on Sport
Camp) and money. This is to prevent loss, theft and damage, but also the disruption of
children phoning or texting when they should be participating in an activity. Phones are
distributed and re-collected during each Age Groups phone call time.
This means that if you see any camper with a mobile phone (either inside the camp or on an
excursion) you must confiscate it from them and hand it to your Activity Co-ordinator. Put the
child’s full name and leader group on a sticker on the phone. The phone will then be placed
with the rest of the leader group’s phones and distributed to the child during the designated
phone times.
Phone call times
NOTES FOR ALL AGE GROUPS ON CAMP:
• Parents and campers are distributed with details of the call times before camp.
• Each child is also asked to bring a mobile phone to camp which they will be hand in
on arrival. Each leader group’s mobile phones are stored together in a box.
• During the allocated phone times, as directed by the Activity Coordinator Leader
Groups take it in turn to phone home.
• When it is their groups turn the Leader Group partner on duty will distribute their
groups phones, carefully ensuring that they tick off each phone as it is given out
• Children will then have between 5 – 10 minutes to phone.
• Campers will then return the phone to their leader who will tick the list to detail that
the phone has been returned. This will prevent kids keeping their phones when they
are not supposed to or simply misplacing them.
• All phones will be re-charged at the weekend by the Camp Driver or Camp Support.
• There are NO phone calls at the WEEKENDS or on the LAST FRIDAY of camp for
any of the campers.
96
English Summer Camp
NOTE The Sophomores can NOT call home on the first Monday and Tuesday of each camp.
This is to ease their integration into camp as experience has shown that phone calls at an
early stage of camp are especially unsettling for the youngest campers at first when they are
still adapting to camp life.
In Sports Camp, Star Camp, Magic Village, Go Camp, and Little Village, there is no main
landline where parents can call in to their children. Kids can only phone using their mobiles
during the times mentioned in the camper timetables.
Little Village students will only be able to use their phone the first Friday of camp to help
promote the Total English policy.
Star Camp campers will have the freedom to have their mobile phones on them at all times.
However, they will only be allowed to use them in appropriate times (i.e. chill out time, NOT
class time).
Campers Money
When campers arrive they put their money in the “Camp Bank”. They can then draw money
from the bank at set times, see the camp programme for these times.
Sophomores: Sophomores can only take money out of the bank the day before they go to
the beach or on an excursion.
Fire Procedure
General Info
In all our summer camps we do a fire drill on the first Wednesday of every camp at 11:00am,
so that all staff are aware of the procedures to take, in case this ever occurred.
We have a complete fire manual with instructions and procedures for the different camps.
Each camp also has their system of firing the fire alarm, so this detail will be given to you by
your Camp Director in a session within in the training week.
It is very important that you as a responsible staff member in charge of a group of campers
stay calm and collected in this type of situation and work as a team with your fellow staff and
directors.
In Family Camp we have a built in system in the school facilities that is sounded throughout
the whole facilities. As in Sports Camp, as it is a hotel, there is also this sound system
throughout the whole facilities.
In Magic Village and Little Village, as these are camping facilities, they do not have a sound
system, although our directors have sirens, so they would be the ones who would sound the
alarm.
In case of the fire alarm going off and during the fire drill, staff should do the following things:
• Round up Leader Group (class group/sports group/ arts and crafts group) and do a
head count and name list check
• Campers evacuate with the groups they are in at the moment and with the assigned
monitor/ teacher who is in charge of them in that moment.
o Wake-up through breakfast with monitors (or assigned leader teacher on days
they cover). LEADER GROUP
o Class time through lunch time with teachers. CLASS GROUP
97
English Summer Camp
Arts and crafts/projects with teachers or monitors in charge. ARTS AND
CRAFTS GROUP.
o Sports time with sports monitor. SPORTS OR EXTRA ACTIVITY GROUP.
o Zone time or evening ent in age groups with monitors. FORM IN LEADER
GROUPS.
o Night time with monitor (or assigned leader teacher on days they cover).
LEADER GROUP
Teachers and Monitors who are not on duty but are on camp should go with their
leader group (if kids in that group) or with a group where they know the children to
help out.
Walk calmly to the congregation area
ƒ Bus Park – Family Camp
ƒ Basketball Court – Sports Camp
ƒ Car Park – Star Camp
ƒ Car Park – Little Village
ƒ Car Park – Magic Village
ƒ Car Park – Go Camp
o
•
•
•
•
•
•
Form up the campers at the congregation area and keep them separate from other
groups(if any)
If appropriate, play small circle games with campers in order to keep them
entertained and under control.
Don’t return to the residence building or activity area until your group has been
counted by a management staff member and you have been informed that you can
do so by your immediate manager.
Coordinators (Activity, TEFL, Welfares) will be responsible for coordinating their age
group leader groups’ (or whatever groups the camper’s are in) movement to the
congregation area.
Specific information for each camp for your roles in your position will be given to you in your
training sessions.
.
98
English Summer Camp
Laundry
At each camp there is a laundry system in place for campers and staff. Each room / tent will
have a laundry bag. This bag will be collected on a set day and then returned the following
morning. Before coming to camp all campers are asked to clearly mark their clothes so this
should ease sorting out their laundry when it is returned.
On the following page there is a draft laundry routine. The final laundry routines will be
displayed prominently around camp.
It is important that you ensure the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Kids must place all dirty clothes in their laundry bag.
Wet clothes are dried before being placed in the bag (kids often don’t understand
this!)
You are aware what day your laundry will be picked up and you ensure your group is
aware of this. Make sure you remind them the night before.
Kids don’t place any dirty clothes in the laundry after their last laundry day.
If anything is missing you inform your Coordinator. Make sure the kid checks
thoroughly before doing this as often they have simply misplaced the item
When the laundry is returned you supervise giving it back to the kids.
Lost Property
In the Summer Camp there are a lot of campers and staff living together and as a result
people lose items. The most common things to be lost are clothes. On Pre-Friday
departures day there is time allocated for packing and that’s when most campers realise that
they have clothes missing.
It is up to the teacher and monitor dealing with the leader group to look for the missing
objects.
• Check the room/tent, neighbouring rooms/tents and friends in case they’ve given it
away and forgotten about it.
• If after checking every area you can’t find the missing object then you should speak
with the Welfare Coordinator who will check with the laundry staff to see if there are
any missing clothes left in the laundry room.
• On departures day there is a stand near the exit whereby any lost objects that are
found during the clean up are put on display for the parents to collect.
• If the object is not found before the camper leaves then the Welfare Coordinator
should take note of the missing object and the name of camper.
• Any objects found with names on them will be posted back within the following
weeks.
Obviously objects of value should not be brought to camp; if you do then you do so at your
own risk.
THE RESIDENCE MONITORS’ LAUNDRY IS PICKED UP WITH THE CAMPERS LAUNDRY. All
dirty clothes must be in the dirty clothes baskets before that morning. The clothes will be returned the
following morning.
99
English Summer Camp
Non Multi Activity Responsibles – Specialist Monitor
During sports sessions, specific staff are assigned to supervise the different groups of non
multi activity campers11. They are not responsible for running the activity rather the
supervision of the children and dealing with any problems that arise. This information is
general and the specialist monitor will get more information during Training Week.
Horse Riding / Sailing / Water sports /Golf Responsibles:
These people must:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Obtain lists of Non Multi Activity children.12
Check that all children are present on the list. If any are missing or you have extra
kids, you must inform the Assistant Director. Don’t leave until the situation has been
resolved.
Collect the Merienda (snack) for your Non-Multi Activity Group. Check you have the
correct number.
Organise loading the buses. Stand at the door and count the kids onto the bus to
ensure you are aware exactly how many get on the bus. Don’t let them get on the
bus without this happening.
At the activity, ensure the children behave and participate in the activities. Deal with
any problems that arise. If children become unwell sit with them.
Participate in the activities with the children and ensure the maximum English input
possible. If an incident occurs though you will have to stop your participation and
deal with the child involved.
On return check the children onto the bus. Double check that you have everyone
before leaving. Make sure the kids have not left anything behind and that they have
left the area clean if they have eaten snack.
When the kids return they must be supervised until it is time for them to go to their
showers at their Age Groups designated time. They CAN NOT be allowed to go off
to the residence / camp site as there will be no one there to supervise them.
NOTE Please see Appendix 7 for details of the different times the children leave and are
picked up. You must check these times with the Assistant Director.
Tennis/ Padel Responsibles
As a Tennis Specialist Monitor you are responsible for all racket sports in the Programme,
Padel, Tennis and Competition Tennis.
Specifically they must:
• Obtain the correct list.13
• Check that all children are present on the list. If any are missing or you have extra
kids, you must inform the Assistant Director. Don’t leave until the situation has been
resolved.
11
See Chapter on Groups for more information.
These can change daily and you must check with the Assistant Director on a daily basis that you
have the most up to date list.
13
These can change daily and you must check with the Assistant Director on a daily basis that you
have the most up to date list.
12
100
English Summer Camp
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Collect and distribute the snack for the Tennis group. Ensure that if the kids eat the
snack on site all rubbish is cleared up.
Organise games for the children whilst they wait for their transport. Some kids will
wait for up to an hour.
Load the minibuses as they arrive. Stand at the door and count the kids onto the bus
to ensure you are aware exactly how many get on the bus. Don’t let them get in mini
the bus without this happening.
Once all kids have been sent off return all sports equipment used to the correct area.
Whilst the kids are at the activity the Tennis Monitor must then find their Activity Coordinator and assist them as required.
Meet the kids on their return at the designated time (this will be communicated) to
meet and supervise the first tennis players that are brought back by the drivers.
When the kids return they must be supervised until it is time for them to go to their
showers at their Age Groups designated time. They CAN NOT be allowed to go off
to the residence / camp site as there will be no one there to supervise them.
NOTE Please see Appendix 7 for details of the different times the children leave and are
picked up. You must check these times with the Assistant Director.
Supercool Specialist Monitor
This is a mix of all types of waters sports. The campers are divided into groups of 9 (for
example) and they are assigned a different water sport each day. This runs from Monday to
Thursday. On Friday they participate in Paintball and Quads.
Super Golf Specialist Monitor
This programme is specific to Sports Camp. It takes place in the morning (9am -2pm) and
replaces English Classes for those who sign up for the activity. It is a complete English
Programme and the students are taught Golf through English.
TECS Musical Star
This is an on-site extra activity for August in Family Camp. This activity will be run by the
Music and Dance Specialist during the sports sessions.
101
English Summer Camp
TECS Young Achievers Award
The TECS Young Achievers Award (concept based on Duke of Edinburgh and President’s
Award) is a programme which is designed to get our older campers involved in educational
and social activities which help develop their maturity and responsibility levels while on
camp, as well as hopefully making them better behaved campers. The programme runs for
all campers in Little Village and Star Camp and is designed to act as a way of controlling
their discipline issues by guiding them to take on responsibility and see the personal benefits
in acting that way.
The basics of the awards are the following:
• There are different levels of awards and each requires passing to the appropriate stage.
o Bronze: achieved on stage 3
o Silver: achieved on stage 4
o Gold: achieved on stage 5
o Stages 1 and 2 have no award linked to them.
• There are three “TECS Young Achievers Award” “point areas” and students need to be
on the same stage in each area to get that award, for example to get a bronze award a
student must be on stage 3, or more, in all the “point” areas. The three “point” areas
encompass the following:
o Responsibility: represents student’s effort to take on responsibility and the way
they perform while taking on the responsibility.
o English Achievement: represents progression and effort in English.
o Helpfulness + Participation: represents a student’s willingness to help out staff
and other campers and they’re general participation in activities.
• What a student has to do to be awarded each stage and pass to the next one is indicated
on the “TECS Young Achievers Award” booklet. A student can not work on stage 2 until
they have completed stage 1. The higher the stage the more difficult the task and the
more effort required to be put in by the student.
• The programme is designed so that it is difficult to achieve an award – note the award
should not be seen as something all campers achieve but rather be seen as
something that is achieved only by those campers who dedicate effort and perform
well. A guideline to what % should ideally achieve each award is (obviously this is only
guideline and is this is the first year of running the award it may not be that accurate):
o Bronze: 25-50%
o Silver: 10-25%
o Gold: 0-10%
• Students only pass the stage for doing the “point area task” well, they do not
receive them just for doing the task rather they MUST do a good job at it. This is the
most important part of the award as otherwise it will be too easy to achieve. For example
a student who half heartedly helps with an evening entertainment should not pass that
stage.
o Students who fail a stage should be told why and given the opportunity to re-do
the stage if they wish.
• Each student will have a “TECS Young Achievers Award” booklet in which the points
gained in each area must be recorded.
o The signature of a staff member validates the achievement of stages 1-2.
ƒ
Stage 1: is judged by the teacher at the end of class on the Tuesday and judges
only their performance in class. If a student is not awarded the stage (only those
who deserve it should be) then they will be judged again on that stage 2 days later
i.e. Thursday.
102
English Summer Camp
ƒ
ƒ
Stage 2: is judged by the LEADER monitor at the “TECS Young Achievers Award”
evening time and again only those who deserve to be awarded a stage should get
it. Students who are not awarded it should be judged again two days later.
For both stages 1 and 2 it is possible to award a student a stage in one TECS
Young Achievers Award Category but not in another. For example with stage 1,
awarding them “English Progression” but not awarding them “Responsibility and
Attitude”.
The signature only of a Coordinator (TEFL, Welfare, or Activity) validates a
student achieving stages 3-5.
There is a time each day in the evening when coordinators will find out which students
wish to attempt to achieve stages 3-5. The coordinator must organise the logistics, i.e.
arranging with for the students to help out with an activity the next day. It is very
important to schedule the times and days when campers will perform each task. In Star
Camp, the campers will use their free time to complete a lot of the tasks.
Coordinators should make sure to offer opportunities to earn points to the students, i.e.
ask who would like to help with room inspection tomorrow or who would like to run a
competition. No students should be forced to attempt a stage but they should obviously
be encouraged to take it on.
Campers should present a proposal to a coordinator for approval (i.e. competition idea,
presentation topic, etc.). Students should take time on these proposals and they should
only be excepted if they are of high quality.
Coordinators will have to decide which students are capable of taking on certain
“responsibility” tasks and only go ahead and organise them for students who they believe
are mature enough to carry out the task well, i.e. to act as a staff member, the
Coordinator must feel sure the camper will act responsibly before agreeing they can do it.
Students are given their “TECS Young Achievers Award” booklet on arrivals day after the
camp introduction. The original presentation must be done by the Activity or Ast.
Coordinator and should ideally have all coordinators present. Students should be
encouraged to check queries and ask questions.
The Black Marks should be used in the case of discipline cases. Any staff member can
assign black marks for bad behaviour. If a student gets 3, then they have to do an extra
task in a specific area, assigned by a coordinator. The Coordinator will choose which
area to go back on and ideally that area should be reflective of what has been the route of
the problem, i.e. if a child’s black marks were mainly caused because of a bad attitude
they probably it is right to do an extra task in the “helpfulness and participation” category.
o In Little Village students can be given black marks for speaking Spanish.
At the end of summer camp successful students will be awarded certificates at the
awards ceremony (top awards in the general, lower ones in senior award ceremony)
stating which award they won (if any) and the higher awards may also have special prizes
– (prizes to be confirmed)
o The top award winners in Little Village (i.e. a camper who wins Gold or Silver if
that is the best award won) should be awarded at the end of the parental
departure show. The rest should be awarded at the Friday award ceremony.
2008 was the first year the TECS Young Achievers Award was run in Little Village. It
worked really well at that camp and now will be done in Star Camp as well. Feedback is
welcome. Major changes in the tasks should be checked with Directors.
o
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Unique Characteristics of Star Camp YAA:
1) The system of black dots does not exist because this can be viewed as a way to control
camper's behavior and does not fit in with the Guided Independence philosophy.
2) The YAA tasks have been modified to fit the characteristics of Star Camp.
3) YAA will be presented to all campers and will be enthusiastically encouraged but not
obligatory.
103
English Summer Camp
TECS YOUNG ACHIEVERS AWARD
AWARD
1.
None
2.
None
3.
BRONZE
JUDGE
Responsibility
English Improvement
Helpfulness +
Participation
CLASS
TEACHER
TUESDAY
ONWARDS
LEADER
MONITOR
WEDNESDAY
ONWARDS
Student shows that they have taken on
personal responsibility for improving their
English.
Responsible attitude about keeping their
cabin/room and bathroom tidy.
Suitable progression in English class.
Helpful attitude and positive participation in
class.
Showing consistent effort to use English outside
of the classroom.
Suitable involvement and behaviour in the
leader group in a way that leads to positive
group dynamics.
Helping with room inspection (must get up
early).
ONE OF THE
COORDS
4.
SILVER
ONE OF THE
COORDS
(HELP- Staff)
5.
GOLD
ONE OF THE
COORDS
Running meal time games in English for a
whole day (Monitor supervision).
Running an activity/ competition in English
(must promote event to get participants).
Working as a staff member’s assistant for a
whole day, doing all the assigned
responsibilities effectively and responsibly and
speaking only in English throughout.
Writing up a 1 page story about your experience
on camp and giving it to a Coordinator to
review.
Giving a presentation in English about topic of
your choice to the rest of the campers, must last
at least 10 minutes (must sign up for time).
Going two whole days without a staff member
hearing you speak a word of Spanish – as
judged by a Coordinator.
Using own initiative to tidy common areas
(games, etc.) and helping tidy up after meal
times (5 different occasions).
For a whole day being a coordinator’s
helper, assisting them with any assigned
task (wake up, role call, lists, evening
entertainment, set up classrooms, etc).
AWARD
BLACK MARKS – 3
Extra task in specified
area- Assigned by
Coord.
●
●
●
●
●
Extra task in specified
area- Assigned by Coord
●
●
●
Extra task in specified
area- Assigned by Coord
●
Extra task in specified areaAssigned by Coord
●
●
●
Extra task in specified areaAssigned by Coord
104
English Summer Camp
TECS Happy Passport
The “TECS Happy Passport” is the Sophomore version of the “TECS Young Achievers Award”.
Whereas the “TECS Young Achievers Award” is more focused on guiding students to be
responsible and mature with a “side effect” of positively addressing behavioural and attitude
issues, the “TECS Happy Passport” is rather orientated towards acting as a way of motivating
and guiding factor for our youngest campers to be positive and happy individuals on camp and
acts as a perfect bargaining tool to deal with Welfare issues which was it’s original principal
purpose.
The key factors of the Happy Passport are the following:
• Campers gain smiley faces for doing certain things.
o There are three types of faces:
ƒ BIG smiley (Very Happy Monitor): to be awarded ONLY to kids
who perform extra well in this area – NOT the standard mark.
ƒ Little smiley (Content Monitor): to be awarded as the standard
mark for kids who do well but not extra well.
ƒ Sad Face (Unhappy Monitor): to be given out when kids perform
poorly in the area.
• Campers gain the smiley faces in different areas.
o The blue ones: the majority of these are daily tasks which reflect tasks
that young campers can at times have problems doing day to day on
camp, i.e. putting on clean clothes, eating well etc… but also areas like
welfare and behaviour are represented.
ƒ These ones are filled out by the leader monitor at putting to bed
– they are filled in at this time to avoid disruption to daily routine.
o The yellow ones: these are ones only for class time and are filled out by
the teacher at the end of class.
o Both monitors and teachers on their own document should keep a track
of the overall progression of the campers, in case some campers decide
to cheat and change their “smilies”.
• The booklet must be carried in the camper’s bag at all times and students must
be told to take extra care not to lose it.
o Leader monitors must make sure the campers are packing in their bags
their happy passports every single day.
• Children with welfare problems will have their passport checked nightly by the
welfare coordinator.
• The final “TECS Happy Passport” will be handed out by the class teacher
during departures to the parents. In many ways the “passport” may become
more important than the student report so teachers should talk specifically
about it when passing the passport over to the parents.
o On the back of the card is some general info in Spanish to help nonSpanish speaking staff to explain what the passport is.
• Both monitors and teacher have a small space to write a final comment, please
try and be as positive as possible as the happy passport is designed to be a
positive motivational influence and not designed to focus on negatives.
o Therefore kids who performed extra well should have very very very
positive comments, kids who performed well should have very positive
comments and kids who did not perform great but tried hard should
receive positive comments.
105
English Summer Camp
If a staff members feels it justified and has discussed the matter
with their manager, the actual camp report if needed can be
used to express negative (but constructive) comments but this is
not the purpose of the happy passport.
The top three children who get the most amount of points in an age group will
be given a certificate and a prize at the awards ceremony. We also encourage
teachers and monitors to award certificates within their leader and class group
for the kids who get the most amount of points.
The monitor and teacher bonus categories are designed to be awarded only in
the case that the camper does something extra special on that day. This could
include:
o Winning some game or tournament in sports, class or arts and crafts.
o Helping another camper with something.
o Notably improving behaviour or happiness after problems on a previous
day – it should be used as tool to bring on improvement in the area and
CAN be used in addition to the normal behaviour and happiness as it is
designed to be an extra motivational factor to induce improvement on a
specific day.
o Speaking excellent English in a situation that warrants recognition.
o At monitor’s/teacher’s discretion awarded for some other achievement.
o At monitor’s/teacher’s discretion used as bargaining tool to achieve
something needed, i.e. to get the campers to be quiet and go to sleep or
to get the campers to do an exercise they don’t usually enjoy.
o Please note that the bonus should ONLY be awarded when something
special was done, as above, and not just be awarded daily.
ƒ Please use the big smiley and small smiley appropriately,
meaning smaller achievements should be represented with the
small smiley and bigger ones with the big, the big smiley should
NOT always be used as otherwise this will diminish the
importance of the bonus for the campers.
Please note that the happy passport is more a tool to evaluate a student’s
effort, participation and attitude than an evaluation of their actual skills or ability
at things - which is more the purpose of the camp report.
o For example a student who speaks excellent English should not always
get the big smiley face for English performance just because they spoke
good English in class but rather they should get one when they do
something extra with their English, i.e. helping a student with an
exercise for example. In this way lower level students who try hard
should be able to achieve more smiley faces than a student who
naturally speaks good English but doesn’t try hard to improve it or
doesn’t strive to do something extra.
ƒ
•
•
•
106
English Summer Camp
TECS HAPPY PASSPORT WEEK 1
TUESDAY
WEDNESDAY
MONDAY
THURSDAY
FRIDAY
MONITOR CATEGORIES
TIDINESS (daily + unpacking and packing)
MEAL TIME (manners, eating well)
CLEAN CLOTHES/HYGIENE (putting on
clean clothes daily, brushing teeth, showers
etc.)
BEHAVIOUR (throughout non-class time)
HAPPINESS (during day and calling time)
BONUS (for special achievement as judged
by the monitor)
N.A
N.A
N.A
N.A
N.A
N.A
N.A
N.A
N.A
N.A
TEACHER CATEGORIES
BEHAVIOUR (In class)
PARTICIPATION and ENTHUSIASM (in
class)
ENGLISH PERFORMANCE (for amount of
English spoken in that day’s class)
CLASS BONUS (for special achievement or
helpfulness)
MONITOR TALLY UP
TOTAL DAILY POINTS
BIG smiley: 3 point
Small smiley: 1 point, Unhappy: - 1 point
DAILY
TOTAL
DAILY
TOTAL
DAILY
TOTAL
DAILY
TOTAL
DAILY
WEEK TOTAL
Camp Manual107
English Summer Camp
Junior I- Book
The I-Book is a motivational tool that will be used throughout the day with monitors and teachers to
help Junior campers to get the most out of their TECS camp experience. The I-Book will help with
welfare issues, promote English in and out of the classroom, as well as facilitate appropriate and
positive behavior when used properly and enthusiastically.
On arrivals day, all campers will receive an I-Book that they will carry around in their bags at all
times of the day. There are set times and days when campers are assessed by the staff.
Campers have the opportunity to earn points for categories such as helpfulness, camp spirit,
English, and tidiness. Campers will also have the opportunity to earn bonus points for going above
and beyond expectations. There are separate categories for the monitors and teachers to fill out.
When and how will staff assess the campers?
The last 15 minutes of class, teachers will award 0-2 points for each category in the teacher
column per day. At the beginning of putting to bed time, monitors will award 0-2 points for each
category in the monitor column to the campers in their leader group. During nightly I-Book time,
monitors tally the points for the day.
0 points- would be awarded to the camper who did not put forth any effort in the category.
1 point- would be awarded to the camper who did a good job in the category.
2 points- would be awarded to the camper who did an excellent job in the category.
In order to promote improvement in the weakest categories, on the first Wednesday of camp, the
teacher and monitor, during I-Book time, identify the two categories where the student has the
fewest number of points. Discuss this with each camper and suggest tasks they could do to
improve these areas. Write these tasks in the ¨Goals for Students¨ section. The more supportive
and encouraging the staff are, the more the kids will be motivated to improve in these areas. If the
campers show improvement in the two areas on Thursday and Friday, the campers will earn 5
bonus points for the week.
Sunday night, when monitors and teachers are on putting to bed duty together, they discuss the
behavior of campers during the excursion. Campers will earn 0-2 points for the excursion. After
awarding all points for the week, staff tally and complete the total for week 1.
As the second Wednesday of Family Camp is English Day, therefore the second mid-week
assessment is Tuesday. Staff follow the same procedure as the first week, identifying the two
categories campers need to improve and setting goals for the students to achieve.
However, since campers leave on Saturday, teachers will collect all I-Books from campers in class
on Friday and tally the points. Teachers will generally give all campers positive marks in the
monitor column on Friday as monitors will not have I-Book time Friday (we want the kids to leave
on a high note!).
Teachers tell the TEFL Coord the top point scorer and that camper is awarded a special certificate
on Awards Night.
Bonus points
We want campers to be proud of their achievements in their I-Book. Campers can also be
awarded bonus points if they do something extraordinary on camp. For example, if a camper
Camp Manual108
English Summer Camp
consoles an upset child during phone time by inviting them to play in a game or by giving them a
hug without prompting from a staff member. Campers are able to earn up to 3 bonus points per
day for surprising acts. It is very important that bonus points are giving out cautiously. We do not
want the bonus points to be awarded for simple acts that campers should naturally do as part of
being a good TECS camper. These are very special points!
Camp Manual109
English Summer Camp
English Star Award (Magic Village)
The English Star Award is an incentive-reward tool designed to promote maximum use of the
Target Language throughout the day on camp. It also aims to control and promote good camper
behaviour. The award comprises two sets of categories where kids can earn points. Each
category is tallied up separately.
i) Behaviour and Language Control Category
a) The monitor’s part
The leader group monitor assesses the Ss on the following three categories throughout the day:
1. Tidiness and hygiene
2. Table Manners
3. Use of Target Language
They give an appropriate score for each category during the House Gathering time every day.
b) The teacher’s part
The leader group teacher assesses the Ss on the following three categories during the morning
‘English in Action’ and ‘English Through Media’ sessions:
1. Helpfulness
2. Effort and Participation
3. Committed to learning through media
They give an appropriate score for each category during the House Gathering time every day.
Scoring:
+
√
-
level higher than average
satisfactory (minimum required)
unsatisfactory
= 2 points
= 1 point
= -1 point
ii) Daily Challenge
There is a separate table listing a number of challenges that the campers have to complete on a
daily basis for extra points. As with the ‘daily categories’, different people are responsible for
awarding different types of bonus points (see below).
If a camper completes a challenge the Staff Member responsible circles the relevant star or gives
them a STAR sticker (if available) and signs the relevant box. If the camper has completed the
challenge to a satisfactory level they get a small star which is worth 2 pts. If the complete the
challenge to an excellent level they get a big star which is worth 3 pts. Challenge points are tallied
up on the last day on camp.
Camp Manual110
English Summer Camp
English Star Award
Challenges
Responsible and Procedure
Ask your monitor 5 questions
about themselves.
The Ss have to ask their monitor 5 general questions about themselves and write down the answers. Then they have to report to their teacher
during House Gathering time and talk to them about the monitor. The teacher decides whether the Ss have completed the challenge.
Find the mystery creature.
Throughout the day, the Activity and TEFL Coords. reveal a number of clues about a mystery mythical creature. These clues can be written and left
in common areas or announced orally during times that all Ss are together. The Ss have to accumulate the clues in order to produce a drawing of
the creature and write a small description of it. They also have to figure out the creature’s name based on the last clue given. During the House
gathering time, the Ss have to present work to their teacher or monitor. The teacher or monitor decide whether the Ss have completed the
challenge.
The Ss have to create their ideal menu. They have to present it to their teacher or monitor during House Gathering time. The teacher or monitor
decide decide whether the Ss have completed the challenge.
Create and present your
favourite menu.
Find out three things you need to
play cricket.
Think of an animal related
question to add to the excursion
questionnaire. Ask the tour guide
your question.
Find the mystery person based
on oral and written clues
revealed during the day.
No challenge due to Intercamp
Competition
10 things you can do with a pine
cone
Listen to the sound clips played
at random times of the day and
note down emotions you hear.
No challenge on last day
Ss ask questions to find out what you need to play cricket. They can ask any staff member at any given time of the day. Staff members can only
reveal one item. When a S has three answers they have to find either the Activity or TEFL coord and report their findings. The Activity or TEFL
coord decide whether the Ss have completed the challenge. First 2 Ss to report (must be from different houses) mark the end of the challenge.
During Friday’s English in action session, all Ss come up with an animal related question to add to the excursion questionnaire. When on tour on
Saturday, the Ss have the opportunity to ask the tour guide their question. The teacher or monitor supervising each group, makes sure that the Ss
who wish to complete the challenge are grouped together and at the end of the tour they let the tour guide know that some Ss want to ask them
some qs. The Ss take turns to ask their qs and the teacher/monitor responsible judges whether they have done it to a degree that has met the
challenge.
Throughout the day, the Activity and TEFL Coords. reveal a number of clues about a mystery person. These clues can be written and left in
common areas or announced orally during times that all Ss are together. When a S think they have found the mystery person they go up to the
Activity or TEFL coord and say: ´I know who the mystery person is. It´s …..’ The coords ask: ‘why do you think it is…..?’ The S has to explain using
the target language. The Activity or TEFL coord decide if the English usage was satisfactory to have completed the challenge.
No challenge due to Intercamp Competition
Ss have to think of ten things that they can do with a pine cone and write them down on a piece of paper. During the House gathering time, the Ss
have to present their ideas to their teacher or monitor. The teacher or monitor decide whether the Ss have completed the challenge.
Throughout the day, the TEFL and Activity coords., play sound clips of songs. Every time a song is played, the Ss have to listen carefully and note
down any emotion words they hear. During House Gathering time, the Ss present their list to their teacher or monitor. The teacher or monitor
decide whether the Ss have completed the challenge. Ss need to have noted down at least 80% of the words.
No challenge on last day
MVPs in House Competition
At the end of camp, a Most Valuable Player (MVP) is selected from each house. The MVP would be the S that has contributed the most points to their
house. Each MVP receives a special distinction.
Camp Manual111
English Summer Camp
Target Language Outline
Monitors and Teachers will use this table to reinforce the key language in and out of the classroom.
Pack
1
Mon 1
Tue 2
Wed 3
Thu 4
Fri 5
Morning
Session
Themes
House
Competition
Introductions
and
Camp
Orientation
Scavenger Hunt
(TEFL lead)
Magical,
Mythical
Creatures
Medieval banquet
(Activity lead)
Food
Sports
Excursion
preparation/
Predators
Cooking and Eating
contest (TEFL lead)
Show me your
Tricks (Activity lead)
Taboo (TEFL lead)
Target language
examples
1. My name is…., I am …. years old
2. We have … at ..., after … and
before....
3. Go straight and after you pass..
1. ‘Dragons are big, red creatures.
They are very strong and aggressive’
2. The Red Dragon comes from …..it
lives in … and its job is to…
English Star
Award Challenges
Ask your monitor 5
questions about
themselves.
Find the mystery
creature.
1. This pizza has tomatoes,
pepperoni and cheese.
2. Can I have… please? , Could you
pass me the … please?
1. My favourite sport is … / I play
every day/ My favourite player is ...
2. He’s playing football/ He’s
shooting.
3. I need a … to play/ do ..
Create and present your
favourite menu.
1. it lives in the….
2. it hunts and eats…
3. it is bigger, stronger...
Think of an animal
related question to add
to the excursion
questionnaire. Ask the
tour guide your question.
Find out three things you
need to play cricket.
Responsible and Procedure
The Ss have to ask their monitor 5 general questions about
themselves and write down the answers. Then they have to
report to their teacher during House Gathering time and talk to
them about the monitor. The teacher decides whether the Ss
have completed the challenge.
Throughout the day, the Activity and TEFL Coords. reveal a
number of clues about a mystery mythical creature. These clues
can be written and left in common areas or announced orally
during times that all Ss are together. The Ss have to accumulate
the clues in order to produce a drawing of the creature and write
a small description of it. They also have to figure out the
creature’s name based on the last clue given. During the House
gathering time, the Ss have to present work to their teacher or
monitor. They decide whether the Ss have completed the
challenge.
The Ss have to create their ideal menu. They have to present it
to their teacher or monitor during House Gathering time. They
decide whether the Ss have completed the challenge.
Ss ask questions to find out what you need to play cricket. They
can ask any staff member at any given time of the day. Staff
members can only reveal one item. When a S has three answers
they have to find either the Activity or TEFL coord and report
their findings. They decide whether the Ss have completed the
challenge. First 2 Ss to report (must be from different houses)
mark the end of the challenge.
During Friday’s English in action session, all Ss come up with an
animal related question to add to the excursion questionnaire.
When on tour on Saturday, the Ss have the opportunity to ask
the tour guide their question. The teacher or monitor supervising
each group, makes sure that the Ss who wish to complete the
Camp Manual112
English Summer Camp
Mon 6
Tue 7
Wed 8
Thu 9
Fri 10
What do they
look like
and what do
they like doing
Clothes
Recycle this!
Touchy, Feely
Life After
Camp
Guess who (after
the board game)
(Activity lead)
No H.C. due to
Inter-camp
Competition
Recycle this!
(Activity lead)
Can’t touch this…
(Activity & TEFL
lead)
Word up (TEFL &
ACTIVITY lead)
1. He has green hair, black eyes and
three teeth.
2. He likes playing video games.
Find the mystery person
based on oral and
written clues revealed
during the day.
1. He’s wearing a red jumper, blue
jeans and black shoes.
2. I can’t find my socks/ my trousers.
No challenge due to
Intercamp Competition
1. I should put an old newspaper into
the blue bin.
2. This model shark is made out of a
coke can.
10 things you can do
with a pine cone
1. I feel tired, I am hungry, I feel
great, I’m happy etc.
2. it feels/ tastes/ looks ...
Listen to the sound clips
played at random times
of the day and note
down emotions you
hear.
1.What are you going to do after
Camp?/ After camp I’m going to….
No challenge on last day
challenge are grouped together and at the end of the tour they let
the tour guide know that some Ss want to ask them some qs.
The Ss take turns to ask their qs and the teacher/monitor
responsible judges whether they have done it to a degree that
has met the challenge.
Throughout the day, the Activity and TEFL Coords. reveal a
number of clues about a mystery person.
These clues can be written and left in common areas or
announced orally during times that all Ss are together.
When a S think they have found the mystery person they go up
to the Activity or TEFL coord and say: ´I know who the mystery
person is. It´s …..’ The coords ask: ‘why do you think it is…..?’
The S has to explain using the target language. The coords
decide if the English usage was satisfactory to have completed
the challenge.
No challenge due to Intercamp Competition
Ss have to think of ten things that they can do with a pine cone
and write them down on a piece of paper. During the House
gathering time, the Ss have to present their ideas to their teacher
or monitor. They decide whether the Ss have completed the
challenge.
Throughout the day, the TEFL and Activity coords., play sound
clips of songs. Every time a song is played, the Ss have to listen
carefully and note down any emotion words they hear. During
House Gathering time, the Ss present their list to their teacher or
monitor. Ss need to have noted down 80% of the words to meet
the challenge.
No challenge on last day
Camp Manual113
English Summer Camp
Pack
2
Mon
1
Tue
2
Wed
3
Thu
4
Morning
Session
Themes
Introductions
and
Camp
Orientation
Geography and
Culture
Natural
Disasters
What´s in a job
House Competition
Scavenger Hunt (TEFL lead).
Directions and places on camp.
CAMP ORIENTATION
Geography quiz. With fun
activities in between. Map, name
a country: hit the continent.
Blindfolded kid puts pin on map.
Put pics of objects / food on map.
Weather signs. Puzzle with all the
countries. Flags.
Role plays on cards: police and
victims. Victims call others. They
give advice and follow up with
sending emergency services.
Coord shouts disaster: where
should you go and why? Ss run to
sign.*
Speed dating: kids ask staff Qs
from paper related to job or study.
2 mins max to talk to each person,
then go on to next. Second round
running dictation relay race: kid
reads Q, runs back to group to get
answer, run back again and write
down answer.
Target language
examples
English Star Award
Challenges
1. My name is…., I am …. years old
2. We have … at ..., after … and
before....
3. Go straight and after you pass..
Ask your monitor 5 questions
about themselves.
1. ‘ Kalimera’ means ‘good morning’
in Greek.
´How can you say ´good morning´in
Russian?´
In Bolivia they speak Spanish
The capital of Ireland is
Dublin.
In the UK it is it is generally cold and
rainy
Find somebody who speaks
another language than English
or Spanish and find out 3 things
about their language, culture and
country.
1.
2.
In a ___ you should/
shouldn’t ____’
Disaster vocabulary
1 A doctor is a person who ____.
2. Doctors use______.
Think of 3 things you should and
3 things you shouldn’t do in this
situation and write it on your
paper!
You’re swimming in the
swimming pool and you see a
crocodile (that starts talking to
you).
What do these people do, what
tools do these people use and
use an adjective to describe the
job.
Responsible and Procedure
The Ss have to ask their monitor 5 general
questions about themselves and write
down the answers. Then they have to
report to their teacher during House
Gathering time and talk to them about the
monitor. The teacher decides whether the
Ss have completed the challenge.
Students go round finding somebody who
speaks another language and ask them
min. 3 questions about their language,
culture or country. During the House
Gathering time, the ss report to one of the
leaders who decides whether the ss have
completed the challenge.
Kids write 6 things down on paper and
give it to one of their leaders.
Ask staff. Fb in house gathering.
Camp Manual114
English Summer Camp
Fri 5
Mon
6
Excursion
preparation/
Predators
Let´s Celebrate
Taboo game: animals, habitat,
bodyparts. Animal circle game
with two animals, all monkey.
Animal running game: kids in
pairs, all have animal like the
ladders game.
Line up in order of birthdays.
Questions can only be asked in
English. Open the present with
your anything but their hands.
Inside is a smaller present and a
question about a staff member,
what did … get? Kids write the
answer down. They then open the
next present.
No.
Tue
7
Wed
8
1. it lives in the….
2. it hunts and eats…
3. it is bigger, stronger...
Think of a question related to the
excursion.
On Saturday the kids ask the
tour guide the question.
This Q will be written on their excursion
questionnaire but also on the English star
booklet.
1 We celebrate _____ in/ on
_______.
Songs for different holidays /
festivities. Kids write down which
holiday it is about and complete
the first line of the song.
Star award is done as last activity on in
house comp but awarded as normal during
house gathering.
2. I opened my present and I got
____ . I liked/ hated it.
3. My favourite festivity is____,
because ___.
1 In my free time, I like
___________.
2. What do you like doing in your free
time?
How often do you __? Where do
you____ ?
What are your best friend’s hobbies?
Home
technology
English day: staff alter ego, song
competitions. House chants.
1. ‘It is useful because __________’ ,
‘You can use it for ___________’ or
‘It is more/ important than the rest
because____________’
2. ‘Before ________ people used
to___________’
Thu
9
Win the intercamp competition.
Hobbies
Typical Food
Eating contest for staff. The
apprentice: new pizza, packaging,
present it. Typical dish from our
country, our village, traditional
dish for our camp! Name, what’s
1. ‘Kebab comes from
Turkey´
´Kebab is a typical Turkish dish´
Find out information about LV.
Who are the staff members?
What is their experience. Latest
gossip. All in English. Timetable.
Is Total English difficult.
MV delegation sent to LV. 1
Ambassador from each house?
Fit into programme.
N.B. Depend on intercamp comp day and
adventure sports day.
Gunk recipe. Gunk comes from
TECS. Gunk is a typical TECS
dish. Have you tried gunk? What
is in it?
2. I have tried Kebab. I tried it when I
was on holiday in Turkey. My friends
Camp Manual115
English Summer Camp
in it.
were there with me. I liked it
3. The most typical dish in my
country is ___ . The main
ingredients of ___ are _____ . I
like/don´t like this dish. I have this
dish once/ twice a week/ month …
Fri
10
Pack
3
Mon
1
Tue
2
Wed
3
´Till next year
Morning
Session
Themes
Introductions
and
Camp
Orientation
S.O.S.–
Wildlife
Very
Superstitious
Word up: revision of language
themes and vocab from last four
weeks.
House Competition
Revision
No challenge on last day
Target language
examples
Scavenger Hunt (TEFL lead)
1. My name is…., I am …. years old
2. We have … at ..., after … and
before....
3. Go straight and after you pass..
Dodgeball inspired save the
endangered species from the
middle or get to the shelter.
1. The blue whale is an endangered
species.
Poster or presentation on how to
look after environment or certain
animal.
2. People will...... so .....
Dieren geluiden spel. Somebody
broke the mirror 6 pieces. Collect
the pieces by finding the hidden
staff member and answering the
questions and asking a specific
question from paper. BUT there is
1. It is good/ bad luck to…
English Star Award
Challenges
Ask your monitor 5 questions
about themselves.
Responsible and Procedure
The Ss have to ask their monitor 5
general questions about themselves and
write down the answers. Then they have
to report to their teacher during House
Gathering time and talk to them about
the monitor. The teacher decides
whether the Ss have completed the
challenge.
Find the mystery animal. Hayden
and McMillan are somewhere.
The kids solve a riddle. First
group to get to coord and give
the correct answer get a star.
3. animals and environment
vocabulary.
Find three staff members who
are superstitious and what their
superstitions are.
In house comp kids answer Qs about
superstitions.
2. If you ………, you will ………
Camp Manual116
English Summer Camp
a black cat! If the black cat finds
you, you lose a piece of the
mirror. But if you find the four
leaved clover you have the
opportunity to win your piece
back. Cat can copy animal
sounds.
Thu
4
Let´s play a
game
Top Trumps. Staff pics with their
age, height, IQ etc. Kids find info
to answer Qs: who is taller x or y?
Staff: predict who is older? 4
members of staff on stage. Who is
the oldest?
1. I need dice and counters to play
´Snakes and ladders
Four things you need to have fun
on camp.
2. Chess is more difficult than Jenga
Find the tallest / oldest person in
your house. Etc.
Fri 5
Mon
6
Excursion
preparation/
Predators
Getting healthy
Taboo game: animals, habitat,
bodyparts. Animal circle game
with two animals, all monkey.
Animal running game: kids in
pairs, all have animal like the
ladders game.
1. it lives in the….
2. it hunts and eats…
3. it is bigger, stronger...
Anagrams that kids rearrange into
words or sentences, then decide:
healthy or unhealthy?
1. Sleeping 8 hrs a day is healthy.
Drinking a lot of soft drinks is
unhealthy.
Gemma I’s game: pic of apple,
kids say, ‘ you should eat an apple
every day because it has a lot of
vitamins’.
2. She should eat more fruit and
less chocolate.
Think of a question related to the
excursion.
On Saturday the kids ask the
tour guide the question.
Come up with a slogan to
promote healthy eating or
healthy behaviour.
Staff: 1 member ‘phones’ with a
problem to 1 member of each
house. Kids can’t see
staffmember, then decide who
gave the best advice.
No.
1. The first pizzeria in the USA
Camp Manual117
English Summer Camp
Tue
7
opened in 1905..
I Love Pizza
Win the intercamp competition.
2. The Australians added
pineapple on their pizzas..
Wed
8
Thu
9
Fri
10
You´ve been
poked!
3. You need to …..
Find out information about LV.
Who are the staff members?
What is their experience. Latest
gossip. All in English. Timetable.
Is Total English difficult.
MV delegation sent to LV. 1
Ambassador from each house?
Fit into programme.
Alternative: the cup has been
stolen! AlMac stole it! In week 1!
He is leaving notes and riddles
etc. House comp is cluedo type
and kids run around to find clues
to find where the cup is.
1. finger prints, tyre tracks, shoe
prints etc
Write five interview Qs for your
favourite celebrity.
Word up: revision of language
themes and vocab from last four
weeks.
Revision
English day: staff alter ego, song
competitions. House chants.
1. forward, reply, attach etc.
2. I´ve been poked/ tagged/
invited…
Crime on Camp
See you later
alligator
N.B. Depend on intercamp comp day
and adventure sports day.
2. Where were you Monday night?
No challenge on last day
Camp Manual118
English Summer Camp
Chapter 10: Understanding the Different Groups on Camp
On camp we have lots of different groups and at first you are sure to be flummoxed by
references to things such as multi and non-multi activity groups, leader groups, project
groups etc. You might well wonder why we need so many groups, but rest assured
there are many good and well thought out reasons for it. The need to organise
campers according to factors such as age, sex, English level, the accommodation and
activities they have pre-selected, makes it necessary to organise them in many
different ways during camp.
What follows is a break down of how the different groups are organised on camp.
There is a lot of terminology to get your head round, but hopefully with careful reading it
will help you to understand the different and very important mechanics of camp life.
First discussion is made regarding divisions made at a Camp level, before we look at
how the groups are organised within each Age Group.
Due to the number of different groups that we have, the responsibility is divided
between the Monitor and Teacher, depending on the time of day for this reason it is
extremely important that you carry your groups list with you at all times. Discipline
procedures will be followed if a staff member is continuously without there lists as it is
for the safety of all involved.
Divisions Made on Camp
Age Groups
The first type of group that exist are the Age Groups. Campers before arriving at camp
are assigned to a specific Age Group based on their age. Staff members are also
assigned to an Age Group and generally work with this Age Group for the length of the
summer. However logistical reasons may result in staff members changing Age Group
during the course of the summer, hence they must be open to this prospect.
Each Age Group has its own program, which is overseen on the Activities side by an
Activity Co-ordinator and on a TEFL side by a TEFL Co-ordinator. These people are
assisted by an Assistant Co-ordinator and together they directly manage the Teachers
and Monitors within their Age Group.
Generally the Age Groups operate independently though they do come together for
some large whole camp activities such as Casino Night, the Awards Ceremony and
Excursions.
In Family Camp the Age Groups are as follows:
Camp Manual119
English Summer Camp
Family Camp
Sophomores
Juniors
Seniors
Aged 6 - 10
Aged 10 - 13
Aged 13 - 17
Magic Village, Go Camp, Star Camp, Sports Camp and Little Village are smaller camps
and only have one or two age groups per camp. As you will see Magic Village has the
equivalent to Family Camp Juniors and Little Village and Sports Camp have the
equivalent to Family Camp Seniors.
Magic Village
Little Village
Go Camp
Star Camp
Juniors
Anglos
Pioneers
Seniors
Aged 10 - 14
Aged 12 - 16
Aged 8-12
Aged 13 - 17
Sport Camp
Juniors
Aged 10-11
Colours and Houses
Campers are also broken down on a camp level into Colours. On arrival at camp, the
kids, like staff members, are assigned to either the Blue or White team. Campers then
compete as part of their colour to win points for Colour War.14 In Magic Village and Go
Camp, the campers will compete to win points for their House instead of their color.
FAMILY, STAR, SPORTS AND LITTLE VILLAGE
Colour War Team
Blue
White
MAGIC and GO
House
TITANS
14
WIZARDS
DRAGONS
See chapter on Colour War for more information
Camp Manual120
Seniors
13-14
English Summer Camp
Residence / Tents (Family Camp Only)
In Family Camp all kids are also defined as either being in the residence or in tents in
terms of where they sleep. Before coming to camp, campers select where they want to
say, with those staying in residence paying a supplement. Each room in residence and
tent on the campsite has a name. To quickly distinguish between the two places with
“The” in front of them e.g. “The Dalgety Bay” are in the residence building whilst places
without “The” are on the campsite e.g. “Big Ben”.
In Star Camp all campers stay in hotel rooms. In Little Village, Go Camp, and Magic
Vilalge all campers are in cabins.
.
Type of Accomodation
Residence
Tents
Divisions made on an Age Group Level
Age Group
Leader
Group
English
Class
Arts and Crafts
/ Project (Only
Seniors)
Multi
Activity
Sports
Groups
Non Multi
Activity
Leader Groups
Leader Groups are the means by which children are grouped for sleeping, meal times
and excursions. Most campers tend to make there closest friends on camp within their
Leader Group as these are the kids they are sharing rooms/tents with.
Who is responsible for the Leader Group?
Camp Manual121
English Summer Camp
A Monitor and an assigned Leader Partner – either a Teacher or an Assistant Monitor.
Responsibilities are shared between the two leader partners and it is essential that they
work well together. Good leader partners undoubtedly create good Leader Groups.
How are they known?
By the name of the Monitor (i.e. Shakir´s Leader Group, Dermot´s Leader Group)
How many campers in each group? How are the groups set?
Between 8 and 16 campers.15 All groups are of the same sex as a leader group is
formed by combining a number of rooms in the residence or tents on the camp site.
What activities are done in Leader Groups?
•
•
•
•
•
Supervision of the campers’ general welfare: making sure campers are well
looked after, enjoying themselves, participating, integrating.
The getting up and cleaning room/tent routine as well as putting to bed
responsibilities.
Eating arrangements at all meals (except for the Seniors who have a free
seating arrangement).
The arrivals day: forming up, tour, initiative games and picking up of baggage
etc
Excursions (the Camp generally goes on excursions as a whole but during the
excursion campers are organised by their leader group.)
English Class Groups
Who is responsible for them?
An individual teacher
How are they known?
By the name of the teacher and their level e.g. Nathanial’s Pre-Intermediate Class.
How many campers in each group? How are the groups set?
Class sizes range from 10-14. On arrival all campers are level tested and placed in a
class that corresponds to their level.
Each Age Group has approximately 5 different levels (sometimes two teachers will be
separately teaching the same level).
Teachers will have the same class for the
duration of the two week camp cycle.
Generally speaking teachers will teach the same level from camp to camp, though this
can not be guaranteed as the number of campers in each Age Group tends to change
from camp to camp. Therefore teachers have to be flexible to the idea that they may
have to change level during the course of the summer. Where this occurs extra
assistance and planning time will be allocated to the affected teacher.
15
Senior Groups may be slightly larger.
Camp Manual122
English Summer Camp
What activities are done in English Class Groups?
Depending on the Age group and camp the class time varies. In Family Camp,
Sophomores have 3 hours of English Class and Juniors and Seniors have 4 hours of
class.
In Family Camp, Magic Village, Star Camp and Little Village, the campers have 3 hours
of class.
Arts and Crafts Group or Project Groups
Who is responsible for them?
A Monitor and a Teacher (or Assistant Monitor). Both work together in teaching the
class though the Monitor will take a more pro-active role in planning the activities
before class. The English Teacher given their TEFL training has a particular
responsibility in helping explain the activities, eliciting language and ensuring as much
English as possible is spoken during the class.
How are they known?
Each group has a separate name e.g. Bravehearts, Satellite Supersonics, Bounty
Hunters.
The Senior Project Groups are known by the name of their project e.g. Film Making,
Dance, Magazine, Basketball, Arts and Crafts, Crew Member Training.
How many campers in each group? How are they organised?
Campers are put into pre-arranged groups within their Age Group according to age.
There are around 14 campers in each group. Some groups are all the same sex,
others mixed.
The Seniors are different and they select their project group when they arrive on camp.
Hence the number in each group will differ.
What activities are done in Arts and Crafts / Project Groups?
Only Arts and Crafts / Projects though as you will note below normally the Arts and
Crafts groups are generally the same as the Sports groups.
Creative Project Group Magic Village
These groups are only in Magic Village. Part of the day will be dedicated to “coaching”
which is why all monitors are recruited as Specialist Monitors to be experts in
Adventure Sports, Drama, Dance, and Film etc… In the afternoon, kids will go into
their groups to practice one of these skills lead by the specialty monitor. Through
focusing on a specific area, the campers throughout the camp will have time to improve
to the best of their ability.
Camp Manual123
English Summer Camp
Sports Groups in Family Camp
Sports Groups
Multi Activity
Non Multi Activity
Family Camp
Horse Riders
Sailors
Padel
What is the difference between a Multi and a Non Multi Activity Camper ?
This is something that may confuse you at first but there is a simple answer!
During sports sessions there are two types of camper Multi Activity and Non Multi
Activity.
Multi Activity signifies that the campers take part in activities organised by our Monitors,
most of which are conducted on site. Activities range from football to quizzes and
many Colour War competitions are also held during this time.
Non Multi Activity campers are taken offsite for the duration of the sports sessions.
They participate in activities organised by companies contracted by TECS. We
however send Monitors with certain groups to ensure the children are being adequately
supervised and to inject as much English as possible. The Non Multi groups contain
campers from ALL the different age groups and the Monitors who supervise these
groups have to be aware that they are responsible for all the children, irrespective of
the Age Group they normally work in.
Campers before coming to camp select whether they want to be multi activity or non
multi activity. Most do the same activity for two weeks; however some campers
change activities each week (for example one week multi activity and one week tennis).
Hence staff members must be careful to ensure they have the correct lists for their
groups throughout the duration of the camp.
Monitors must be aware that campers pay a supplement to go take part in Non Multi
Activities hence kids can not suddenly decide that they want to change activity without
seeking authorisation from their parents and this fact being correctly communicated to
the Assistant Director.
Camp Manual124
English Summer Camp
How are the groups known?
Multi Activity: Sophomores and Juniors
Each Multi Activity Group has the same name as an Arts and Crafts group. This is
because essentially the groups are the same16
Multi-Activity: Seniors
During sports sessions multi-activity Seniors have the option to choose between a
number of different sports. This means there are no set groups as the kids may
choose a different activity, from the range of set options, during each sports session.
Non Multi Activity: All Age Groups
For non-multi activity campers there is no distinction between Age Group. They are
simply known by the activity that they do i.e. Tennis, Horse Riders, Sailors.
How many campers are in each group? How are they organised?
Multi Activity
As discussed they are essentially the same as Arts and Crafts groups i.e. campers are
put into pre-arranged groups within their Age Group according to age. There are
around 14 campers in each group. Some groups are all the same sex, others mixed.
Non Multi Activity
The size of each group is different depending on the number of kids who have selected
this option. The size of the group will determine the number of monitors assigned to
supervise them.
What activities are done in Multi Activity / Non Multi Activity Groups?
Kids are only divided into these groups during sports sessions.
16
Although especially between weeks 1 and 2 of camp their will be some differences as kids
change from multi to non-multi activity.
Camp Manual125
English Summer Camp
Chapter 11: Colour War
Colour War was introduced to TECS summer camp in the summer of 2000 and was an
instant hit with the children. It now encompasses all elements of camp and acts as an
excellent means for the kids to channel their natural competitiveness and a motivating
tool for staff to tap into.
What is Colour War?
Colour War in its most basic form is a huge competition which spans the entire camp.
On arrival at camp, each child and staff member is allocated to either the WHITE or
BLUE team and they remain in this team for their stay on camp.
Colour War lasts for 2 weeks and during this time the WHITE and BLUE teams, from all
the age groups, compete in competitions to win points for their colour in their quest to
win the COLOUR WAR CUP.
The Competitions
Colour War runs throughout the camp. Campers can win points in many different
ways, competing in sports sessions, winning competitions in Arts and Crafts or during
many of the evening entertainments such as Capture the Flag and Cluedo.
During camp kids also compete in their English class to gain Colour War points. Full
details of the scoring system can be found on the following page.
An important way kids can earn points is by “Winning a Card”. If a staff member feels
that a camper has made an extra special effort to speak English or gone out of their
way to help a staff member or fellow camper, the staff member can give the camper a
card.
NOTE Cards should only be given out where kids make an extra special effort to do
something (such as clean up for everyone without being asked or helping take care of
another camper who is obviously upset)
The staff member must complete the card, have the child sign it and give it to the
camper. The camper will then deposit the card in the box in reception. The IT
specialist will empty the box daily and write up a sheet detailing the names of the kids
who have received a card and the reason they received it. This sheet will be on display
with the Colour War points.
Staff members can obtain cards from their Co-ordinators.
Example of details input on card:
Campers Full Name:
Colour:
Age Group:
Date:
Staff Member:
Reason for Card:
Juan Rodriguez
Blue
Juniors
Tuesday Week 1
Aidan Kenny
Juan explained how to play a game to his group using excellent
English
Camp Manual126
English Summer Camp
How do I communicate the points that are won?
•
•
•
•
•
Points won in Arts and Crafts will be collated by the Arts and Crafts specialist
and handed to the IT specialist.
Points in English class will be communicated to your TEFL Co-ordinator at the
last Friday meeting of each camp.
Points won during sports sessions will be communicated to your Activity Coordinator
Activity Co-ordinators are responsible for collecting points from Evening
Entertainment sessions
The points won for campers who received a card for speaking good English will
be collected from the box by the IT specialist.
The IT Specialist is then responsible for collating all these points and updating
scoreboards on a daily basis.
The Award’s Ceremony and Victory Dinner
The Camp Awards Ceremony is held the last Friday of every camp.
handed out per Age Group for the following:
• Room Inspection Winners
• Ironman / Ironwoman winners
• Best at Sports
• Best at Arts and Crafts
• Most Helpful Camper
• Best Effort in Speaking English
Awards are
Tension then mounts as the Colour War points from the final day are added – English
Classes, the Litter Pick and Manhunt - and the winners are announced.
The losing colour is then taken out to the loser’s dinning area accompanied by the
monitors of the winning team. Then, after some ecstatic celebrations, the winning team
are chaperoned to the champion’s tables for dinner. There they are waited on by the
unfortunate monitors and teachers of the losing team17, which gives the winning
children a chance to get their own back: COLOUR WAR IS WORTH WINNNING!
Colour War Positions
On camp positions within each Colour are filled by staff members and campers. These
people are responsible for motivating and organising their teams throughout the
duration of Colour War.
Colour War Generals
One staff member for each colour in each age group will be selected by the
Coordinators to be the overall leader of the Blues or Whites – “The Colour War
General”. This person will change after each camp. They have the following
responsibilities:
17
Note Colour War General´s however remain with their own Colour regardless if they won or
lost.
Camp Manual127
English Summer Camp
•
•
•
•
•
•
Organising their teams for competitions.
Motivating and inspiring their team.
Teaching their team their Colour War dance.
Teaching the children the rules of certain games.
Lifting the cup in the event of victory
Organising certain staff competitions.
Colour War Captains
Within each Age Group one boy and one girl are elected as “Colour War Captains”. In
the Sophomores, given their age these captains are elected by the staff. However in
the Juniors and Seniors the campers themselves vote for the campers they want to
lead their colour.
The Colour War Captains are the Colour War leaders of the campers within their age
group. They are responsible for:
• The selection of Colour War sports teams.
• The motivating and organising of the other campers in all Colour War
competitions.
• Helping out the Colour War Generals during Colour War gathering sessions.
• Lifting the cup and raising of the flag in the event of victory.
Senior Captains
Due to their age and because they are seen as the overall leaders of the campers in
Colour War, the senior captains have certain responsibilities and privileges that Junior
and Sophomore Captains do not.
These extra responsibilities include helping out with some of the colour events of the
Sophomores and Juniors and managing some of the sporting teams of the younger
age groups. Also some supervision of Sophomores during daily activities may be
required. The captains will also be seen as representatives of the senior campers and
will meet daily with the coordinators at 19.35 to discuss any relevant matters.
Captains who perform well will be given a certificate stating that they have helped look
after younger children and will be given a recommendation to apply to be a crew
member the following year. Possible privileges will be a trip during sport’s time to the
cinema on TECS or a trip to the commercial centre at night. The number of privileges
will depend on how seriously the captains are taking their responsibilities.
Colour War Vice Captains
The two boys and two girls from the Juniors and Seniors who receive the second and
third most votes are assigned as Vice Captains. Their role is to act of the right hand
men of the Captains and organise their teams in certain events.
Selection and Elections of Campers
Junior and Senior:
On arrivals day the position of captain is explained to campers. The elections then take
place on the first Tuesday of camp (or Monday if Capture the Flag is played that day).
All campers vote for boy and one girl within their colour to be captain.
Camp Manual128
English Summer Camp
Sophomores:
At Tuesday meetings the monitors and teachers will discuss with their Coordinators
who they think should be chosen as captains and then the Activity Coordinator will
announce at the Tuesday evening entertainment who have been chosen as the
captains.
House Competition: Magic Village and Go Camp
In lieu of Colour War, Magic Village and GO Camp have a House Competition.
Campers and staff will be divided into four groups, which they will be in throughout the
camp for classes and activities. The daily House Competition is a series of events
whereby Houses compete with each other for points. These points are added to the
collective or individual points earned at different times in the day. At the end of the two
weeks all points are tallied up to give the final score and declare the Camp House
winners.
The House competition is made up by 10 events, 6 TELF-oriented and 4 Activityoriented.
By TEFL-oriented it is understood that the event requires the use and understanding of
language and the latter is the main tool employed to earn points (e.g. Scavenger Hunt,
Quiz night etc.). The TEFL Coordinator along with the teachers is responsible for the
organization and running of these events.
By contrast the Activity-oriented events focus on other skills and the general
enthusiasm and willingness to participate (e.g. Medieval Banquet, Karaoke night etc.)
Of course, that is not to say that no language use is required in this type of events,
rather that it is not the decisive factor for awarding points. The Activity Coordinator
along with the monitors is responsible for the organization and running of these events.
All staff is present during every day’s House Competition to support and inspire their
House to win. At the end of each Campers´ House Competition, there will be one or
two rounds when staff would compete. The winners of these mini-events would win
points that would be added to their Houses´ general scores.
Camp Manual129
English Summer Camp
Colour War Points
SPORTS / EVENING EVENTS
Team Sports organized on Competition Days
15 points
Individual Sports Events
1st
2nd
3rd
Ironman
1st
25 points
2nd
15 points
3rd
10 points
4th=9, 5th=8 etc..
Competitions within multi-activity group
5 points
Colour War Basketball Match (Clash of the Titans)
50 points
Manhunt
5 points per sash
Capture the Flag / Aqua Attack
25 for winning team
Events such as Cluedo / Quiz / Water war / Orienteering
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
15 points
10 points
5 points
25 points
20 points
15 points
10 points
5 points
ARTS and CRAFTS
Best Art Piece for each scheduled A&C
activity in each class
1st
2nd
3rd
5 points
3 points
1 point
WINNING A CARD
For speaking good English or good behaviour
5 points for each card
ENGLISH CLASS
Winning Colour within class at end of camp
50 points.
Winning Colour
25 points
LITTER PICK
Camp Manual130
English Summer Camp
Chapter 12: Team Spirit, Morale and Working Together
There can be no doubt that working on any summer camp is hard work, and that
working on a language summer camp can be even harder work still, in both a physical
and psychological sense. This is a fact that any successful camp worker, regardless of
their role on camp, must accept and be physically and psychologically prepared to deal
with while on camp.
Camp is, and will be this summer for all of you, an environment of extremes. One
where at one moment, you will love your job and the next you could be feeling the
opposite! However, a wise and competent worker will choose not to focus on this down
moment but think about the fact that things will soon be great again. Being able to do
this will mean camp will give your more positive experiences and memories than
negative.
A big part of staying positive is remembering that you are an essential part of a large
team of people which from Director to Crew Member all have the same work
objectives, providing, in this order: a safe educational and fun environment for the
children on our camp. It is therefore essential that as a large team we all work
together and push in the same direction rather than against each other. If everyone
pushes in the same direction, things will work better and naturally everyone will be
more content in their job.
However this does not mean that everything will always go perfectly on camp because
of course it won’t and expecting it to would be a mistake. Indeed being mentally
prepared for the fact that problems will occur at some point during the summer is
another mental skill vital to one’s wellbeing on camp. When a problem occurs, a good
staff member will always look first for the solution before trying to work out why the
problem exists.
Afterwards revision of this situation of course must be done to
prevent the problem happening again and at meetings you will be given the opportunity
to express your views on the cause of the problem but we ask, for obvious team morale
reasons, that this is always done in a constructive analytical way as deconstructive
complaining will always achieve nothing but complaining!.
We ask that you also bear in mind that empathising with each other’s problems and
difficulties, being able to put oneself in other people’s shoes, is very helpful for
maintaining positive team morale. Be patient with your peers and strive to understand
their problems and be prepared to offer your support and help when you can, as no
doubt at some point you will need theirs. Also remember to bear in mind that everyone
in the management team has very difficult and demanding jobs and sometimes they
as well may need your support or positive words, a slap on the back saying “well done”
undoubtedly makes us all feel good! The management team have all been teachers or
monitors on camps before and hence will be able to empathise with most of the
challenges you face on camp and offer the needed support, encouragement and
advice you all need, therefore letting them know that you appreciate their help and
understand that they have a difficult job and are doing the best they can will also
always be appreciated and foster positive relations between staff and the management
team.
Camp Manual131
English Summer Camp
How can we work together to maintain team morale?
We can all contribute to a positive mood on camp and below are some pointers as to
how to achieve this.
•
Focus on the positive at all times. Remind yourself why you are there and
remember the smiles, tears and hysterics when the kids leave. You helped
create that!
•
Be prepared for the areas of the job you believe will be difficult for you.
•
Recognise and remember that you are a key part of a large team.
•
Make sure we are all working together and pushing in the same direction.
•
Focus on solutions not problems.
•
Offer constructive rather than deconstructive criticism (the second achieves
nothing!).
•
Empathise with others and put yourself in their shoes.
•
Offer support to those who need it and seek it when you need it.
•
Recognise that the management team have difficult jobs and share the
same job objectives as staff. We are all one team working together. It’s not
an “us and them” type of environment!
Expressing Concerns
If you do have concerns on camp it is important that you know how to address them.
Keeping them bottled up and letting them eat a way at you will only serve to get you
down and remember no one can read your mind. However do recognise that there is a
time and place to raise any query or concern that you might have.
The following system and procedure exists for expressing staff concerns:
•
•
•
•
•
Anonymous concerns can be left in the “staff suggestion box”, which will be
placed in an appropriate place for staff to access in each camp; i.e behind the
reception desk in Family Camp. This will be checked frequently and then action
will be taken if deemed possible.
Coordinator Meetings; any general concerns can be discussed with the
Coordinators at these times. If it is a personal concern, you should arrange a
one to one meeting with your age group Coordinator.
One to one meetings with the Camp Directors and/or the Welfares can be
arranged if required but these should be arranged only after first meeting with
the relevant Coordinator.
General Meetings will be held before the start of each new camp (every two
weeks) and some general but not personal concerns can be raised and
discussed at these meetings.
Meetings can be arranged with the TECS Director of Language Camps if
required.
Camp Manual132
English Summer Camp
Chapter 13: Arrivals Day
Arrivals Days are where it all really starts. It many ways it is one of the most important
days on camp as the kids arrive and are integrated into the camp – and as the old
saying goes “first impressions really do count!”.
In that respect it is important that we all work together to create a warm, welcoming and
professional environment for the campers to enter. And of course the first day is your
chance to set the standards you expect for your group of kids.
What follows is a look at arrivals day from a camper’s perspective as clearly this day
can be a scary experience for them!
Arrivals Day through a Camper’s Eyes
Arrivals Day can seem at first glance like a scary day for both campers and parents
alike. Campers are entering a new world, the “world of camp and English” where
everything can at first seem daunting. First of all, the major challenge is the change of
language and then comes the making of new friends. For parents the day can also be
challenging, as leaving their child can be difficult. However once on camp both
campers and parents realise that there is nothing to fear. Camp is a different world, but
it is a welcoming and embracing one.
The first thing that will strike you when you arrive is the abundance of people wearing
red t-shirts. The “red t-shirt” people are not to be feared because these are in fact the
TECS Staff, and although they may speak a different language, you will find them
friendly and very flexible at using hand-signals and facial expressions to convey what
they mean. After encountering the first red t-shirt, the arrival family will be led on a task
based circuit through camp. There are the bags to be dropped off, the Directors to
meet, documents to be left with the secretaries, camp T-shirts to pick up, photographs
to be taken and finally the goodbyes to be said. The goodbyes can be emotional,
teary, but by now you should be feeling that camp is a safe and inspiring place rather
than a scary one.
The first part of the arrivals day for the kids are the arrival games. The games provide
the opportunity to make those first important friends on camp and also an easy way of
getting to know those funny “red t-shirt” people, who you will find to be not only friendly
but also rather entertaining. Games will be played with ropes, with a parachute, in
teams, in pairs, individually, with rackets, with balls and many of them will provide
memorable memories...enjoy!
Depending on the camp, 14.00 (Puerto) and 18:00 (other camps), when the bulk of
campers should have arrived, the day splits into three separate programmes for the
different age groups. Unpacking, Level testing, the Tour, the Initiative Games and the
inauguration of Colour War (raising the flag) will all be done by the age groups at
separate times before the staff presentation at night.
Unpacking is done with your group monitor and teacher who you will have been
introduced to when arrivals day has closed. First your bags are picked up and then
with your leader you will go to your tent/ room to organise your things.
Camp Manual133
English Summer Camp
Level Testing is done in the class rooms in your leader group. The tests will last for
around about 30-45 minutes.
The Tour is again done with your group leaders. You will be taken to all the important
areas of camp and shown where certain sports and evening entertainments take place.
Also you will be shown where the information boards and camp daily programs are.
Finally you will get your first feel of Colour War when you are introduced to the Colour
War cup and the colour records and scoreboards.
Initiative Games:18 The initiative games are team building mental and physical puzzle
games. In your leader group you might be faced with the challenge of getting a new
friend through a hole in a rope spider web while he/she is lying on their back and the
hole is 1.5 metres of the ground......challenging but great for bonding!
Colour War Introduction: This is the time when you will be introduced to the two staff
members in your age group who are the Colour War Generals (leaders). There will also
be some quick Colour War games to get you in the mood for the all the competitions
that await throughout camp.
Staff/Camper Challenge: Is for the Seniors and involves fun competitions between
staff and camper representatives.
Raising the Flag: This is the official start of Colour War. The flag of the colour
holding the Colour War cup is raised on the colour war flag pole and it will remain there
until the other colour manages to displace it, by winning Colour War.
In the evening all the camp congregates in the hall for the Staff Presentation. The
staff presentation will consist of a number of humorous sketches performed separately
by the monitors and teachers of the different age groups and another performed by the
Management Staff of the camp. Here you will get to know all the staff, and hopefully
you will be provided with an entertaining, if not classy, set of performances.
After the staff performances the Sophomores go off to bed while the Juniors, Freshmen
and Seniors have short discos in their respective areas.
Transfers on Arrivals Day
We have campers that arrive from all over Spain and we arrange to do certain pick ups
throughout Andalusia. A representative of TECS (Specialist Monitor) has to go on the
bus to collect the various campers and make them feel comfortable starting their
adventure with us on the Summer Camp.
The day before Arrivals Day the Ast. Director will have the transfer list with all the
students’ names and collection points complete. The specialist monitor is assigned to
do the specific transfer and should take with them:
• A copy of the transfer with a list of all campers.
• A TECS Mobile phone with relevant phone numbers.
If it is a transfer on departures day then they should also have with them:
18
These are only played in El Puerto on Arrivals Day. They are played later in the week during
a Barbeque Night for the other Age Groups.
Camp Manual134
English Summer Camp
•
•
•
The class folder with certificates.
Mobile phone of the campers
Blue Envelope with tickets (Train or Plane) and pocket money.
Arrivals Day Schedule Per Camp
Each camp has an Arrivals Day Schedule, the timetable is different from that of a
normal day on camp. On each Arrivals Day it is important you have this schedule with
you along with all the lists for your groups so that you can check off all the details. You
will find the changes timetable in the Arrivals and Departure’s Manual.
NOTE During this day many campers will ask to change room / age group etc. You
must communicate all this information to your Activity Coordinator who will tell you
whether or not it is possible. Don’t make any changes on your own as each change
has a lot of knock on effects, such as for class sizes, space in rooms etc and only the
Activity Coordinators will be aware of all of the different factors that need to balance
together
Arrivals Day: Sports Camp
Arrivals day for Sports Camp is different than the arrivals day at the other camps.
Since it is set in a hotel, with the senior age group, the day’s activities are modified
slightly. The campers drop off their bags and proceed to check in with their documents
(as in the other camps). After the campers have gone to their assign room, they will
have a bit of freedom to walk around the hotel grounds with their parents, guided by a
staff member, to get orientated. There will be age appropriate activities for the
campers run by the monitors and teachers.
Staff Responsibilities: Set up and Tidy Up
Note: These responsibilities are in affect for both arrivals and departures days.
On Arrivals and Departures days all staff members are assigned to camp site set up
duties before and after these days. This is a hectic time were staff pull together to
complete the various jobs that need to be done. These jobs may include litter picks,
posting or taking down signs, helping with camp setup or rearranging of materials,
orientating parents and campers, or helping with the final tidy up and
maintenance/cleaning jobs. It is imperative that the staff members all work together
on these days to ensure the procedures run smoothly.
Camp Manual135
English Summer Camp
Chapter 14: Excursions
*Refer to main excursion manual for specific information on individual
excursions*
General
Excursions are held every second Saturday and Sunday of camp.19 These excursions
are grand affairs and represent a chance to relax outside the confines of camp and see
a bit more of what lies around us in Andalusia. However whilst much fun will be had,
please remember that organising excursions for over 25 0 kids is no easy affair, so you
must be on your guard at all times as you are working after all!!
Below are bite sized descriptions regarding the excursions to give you a better idea of
what awaits you:
Water World – Aquasherry (Family Camp)
This excursion takes in a walking tour of El Puerto, a chance to visit the bull ring,
cathedral and castle and spend some time relaxing having lunch in a park near the
river. As it´s the south of Spain and hot hot hot, the afternoon is spent enjoying all the
attractions of Aquasherry, a water park packed full of slides, pools and attractions.
Water Adventure
A trip to an island off Nova Sancti Petri awaits and a day spent enjoying all the joys that
beach life has to offer – kayaks, banana boats, speed boats, beach games.
A Touch of Britain – Gibraltar
For this excursion it is off to Gibraltar so don´t forget your passport!! A chance to visit a
part of the world rich in history and marvel at the locals ability to speak Spanglish (they
literally change language mid sentence without a second thought). St Michael´s caves
are visited then it´s off to see one of Gibraltar’s main attractions – the monkeys (hold
onto your food!)
Sevilla – Isla Magica
For our Puerto camp the Sophomores and Juniors spend the morning at Jerez Zoo
whilst the Seniors head straight for Seville20, which for those who haven´t visited is a
quite breath-taking city – though be aware during the summer it is one of the hottest
cities in Europe! The afternoon is then spent in the Isla Magica theme park, which is
sure to provide everyone with loads of fun!
Animal and Nature Adventure – Whale Watching in Tarifa
For this excursion it is off to Tarifa, an area famous for it´s watersports and home to
beaches that stretch as far as the eye can see. The morning is spent out at sea21
searching for dolphins and whales before the afternoon is passed on one of Tarifa´s
finest beaches.
19
E.g. Those weekends that are not departure and arrivals weekends. Though smaller
excursions are held for the small number of 4 week campers at the ends of camps 1 and 3 as
they span 2 different camps.
20
When Sancti Petri do this excursion the whole camp goes straight to Sevilla
21
The Sophomores in El Puerto don’t go whale watching. Rather they visit a Farm School
before spending the afternoon on the beach.
Camp Manual136
English Summer Camp
Selwo Safari
This excursion takes us to Estepona on the Costa del Sol. There is the chance to
search for animals in the safari park before spending the afternoon relaxing on the
beach.
Weekend in the Mountains – El Bosque
Our 4 week campers spend in weekend in the mountains between camps 1 and 2.
Staying in a youth hostel in the picturesque village of El Bosque they have the
opportunity to relax away from camp and enjoy being in the country.
Excursions Dates for 2010
Day
Family Camp
Saturday 10
July
Waterworld (El
Puerto de Santa
Maria)
Sunday 11
July
Spice of Andalucia
(Sevilla y Isla
Mágica)
Tuesday, 13
July
Wednesday 14
July
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Sophomores+
Juniors)
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Seniors)
GO! Camp
Star Camp
Magic Village
Sports Camp
Water
Adventure
(Sancti Petri)
Touch of Britain
(Gibraltar)
Sea Life
(Benalmádena) +
Beach
Touch of Britain
(Gibraltar)
Parents Day
Water World
(Algeciras) + Tarifa
Waterworld (El
Puerto de Santa
Maria)
Safari Adventure
(Selwo in
Estepona)
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Juniors)
Intercamp
Comp
In Family
Camp
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Seniors)
Saturday 17
and Sunday 18
July
Weekend in THE MOUNTAINS
Saturday 24
July
Water Adventure
(Sancti Petri)
Saturday 7
August
Safari Adventure
(Selwo-Estepona)
(Soph+Jun)
Water World
(Algeciras) + Tarifa
(Sen)
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Juniors)
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Seniors)
Touch of Britain
(Gibraltar
Sunday 8
August
Water World
(Algeciras) + Tarifa
Saturday 14
and Sunday 15
August
Weekend in the
mountains
Alcornocales
(EL BARRICHE)
Sunday 25
July
Tuesday, 27
July
Wednesday 28
July
Saturday 21
August
Sunday 22
August
Waterworld (El
Puerto de Santa
Maria)
Parents Day
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Senior)
Little Village
Whale Watching
(Tarifa)
Tecs English
Adventure
(Sierra de
Grazalema)
NO INTERCAMP
Chill out
weekend
Whale Watching
(Tarifa)
Crocodile Park
(Torremolinos) and
Beach
Water Park
Algeciras
Gibraltar (Touch
of Britain)
WaterPark
(Torremolinos)
Water Adventure
(Sancti Petri)
Spice of
Andalucia
(Sevilla y Isla
Mágica)
Tecs English
Adventure
(Sierra de
Grazalema)
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Seniors)
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Juniors)
Intercamp Comp
In Family Camp
(Senior)
NO INTERCAMP
Waterworld (El
Puerto de Santa
Maria)
Spice of Andalucia
(Sevilla e Isla
Mágica)
Camp Manual137
English Summer Camp
Organisation and Responsibilities
For each excursion either the Camp Director or Assistant Director is in overall charge.
Each Age Group will be managed by either their TEFL or Activity Coordinator.
Each excursion weekend, staff will go on either the Saturday or Sunday excursion. The
other day is their day off.
During the excursion, the campers are organized by Leader Group. Every Leader
Group has two Leader Partners.22 To decide who does which excursion, each leader
partner will be assigned an A and B category. The “A´s” will go on the Saturday
excursion and the “B´s” on the Sunday, for example. It is possible for the partners to
swap excursion days but they must okay that with each other and their Coordinator.
Putting to Bed / Getting Up Excursion Routine
On duty excursion staff will:
• Put their Leader Group to bed the night before the excursion and wake them up
the next morning.
• Sleep in where the Leader Group’s Monitor normally sleeps as they have
responsibility throughout the night for the group. (The Leader Partners swap
beds)
• Make sure all campers in their Leader Group have all equipment for the day
before leaving for breakfast (TECS T shirts, swim wear, money etc. (note)
Sophomores, Juniors and Freshmen must wear TECS t-shirts on excursion.)
• Take their Leader Group to breakfast and eat with them
• Make sure the Leader Group have been to the toilet, because sometimes the
bus journey can be long and we won’t have time to make stops.
From Breakfast to the Excursion
The Leader Group, with their assigned staff member, will not leave the breakfast
tables until told to by the on duty Coordinator. Therefore staff members must keep all
children sitting at the tables. This is the time to make sure all children have gone to the
toilet.
Your entire group will leave the table and load onto the buses only when instructed to
do so by your Coordinator. Keep the entire group together when walking to your
group’s ALLOCATED bus (i.e. the one which has your group’s name on it). When
boarding the bus the Director will check the group as they get onto the bus. Once on
the bus, you as the staff responsible for the group need to ensure that they are okay
and also when the journey starts you are the responsible person for controlling their
behavior while on the bus. You must sit close or next to your group.
When getting off the bus. The campers get off by Leader Group; this will be
coordinated by the bus responsible.23 As the staff member responsible for your group
you must keep your group together and then when instructed, make sure you get off
the bus first. Use your lists to check you have your entire group.
22
23
See section on Leader Groups if need be for more information.
See below
Camp Manual138
English Summer Camp
The same procedure for getting on and off the bus happens throughout the day of the
excursion. USE YOUR LISTS AT ALL TIMES! If you’re unsure about anything inform
your Coordinator and/or the staff responsible for your bus.
Throughout each excursion there will be meeting points/areas established and times
allocated to meet. Ensure that you as a responsible member of staff are at the meeting
point at least five minutes before the allocated time. If you are leading a group, then
make sure that you and the group are at the meeting point promptly.
The different age groups can at times have different requirements, for example walking
down the main street in Gibraltar, the Sophomore Age Group have to be accompanied
at all times in Leader Groups with two members of staff with the group. At this point in
the excursion, the Juniors and Seniors are allowed to wonder on their own and then
meet their member of staff at the meeting point. Full information on the specific
timetable and responsibilities of an Excursion will be distributed at the pre-excursion
meeting.
Bus Responsible
Each bus for the excursion will have one member of staff (normally a Coordinator) who
will be responsible for that bus. Responsibilities of the “bus responsible” will include:
• Discipline on the bus.
• Knowing who is on the bus.
• Knowing the correct numbers of campers/staff on the bus and making sure that
this is correct throughout the excursion.
• Coordinating getting on and off the bus.
• Assigning staff to sit in different areas of bus.
• Coordinating loading and unloading of bus.
Important Excursion Notes
Meeting Points
Meeting points and times are vital aspects in the structure and organization of an
excursion. Always make sure your group knows exactly what time and where they
have to be back before sending them off; double and triple check with them to avoid
any mistakes. If any children do turn up late, they will be kept behind the next time the
group is sent off for at least the number of minutes they were late.
Alcohol and Smoking
No drinking of alcohol is permitted on excursions. This includes during the times
when you are not directly responsible for a group. This rule exists for obvious legal and
safety reasons and staff should be aware doing so could be viewed as a breach of
contract.
Staff can also only smoke when they are not responsible for a group and when doing
so must make efforts to hide it from the kids.
Time Off
As noted staff members will have allocated time off during each excursion. However
they must be aware that during this time they still have general responsibilities towards
the campers. Hence if they see any camper acting contrary to any camp rule (such as
drinking, smoking or buying anything inappropriate) they must act accordingly.
Camp Manual139
English Summer Camp
Supervision of Sophomores / Youngest Juniors
During the excursions, staff will have allocated time off away from the kids. As the
youngest campers (all Sophomores and some Juniors) require constant supervision
during excursions, this means that a rota system operates with regard to looking after
them. All staff, regardless of Age Group will participate in this. There will always be
two staff members assigned to each of these groups to aid control.
This means staff must be aware of how to control Sophomores. Given their age they
are liable to wonder off and staff must be aware at all times where they are.
Taking over the Group
• When taking over the group make sure you obtain the group list from the staff
members you are substituting.
• Also ask the staff members where they have been so you know where to take
them next.
• Remember their English level will be very low, so take extra effort to grade your
language.
Checking you have all your Group
• During your supervision it is imperative you have all the kids with you at all
times.
• Realistically you are never going to learn the names of the entire group in a
short time, therefore a fun and effective way to organize them is to give each
kid a number.
• This means that whenever you want to check that you have the entire group the
kids shout out their number in turn and you can quickly work out who is missing.
The kids actually really enjoy this!
Walking with Kids
• When walking around always have one staff member at the front and one at the
back, this way kids can’t wonder off.
• The younger ones will have no problems holding hands (with each other and
with you) and this is a great way of keeping them in check.
Taking them on Attractions
• Work with your fellow staff member and think logically about how to organize
the kids when taking them on an attraction.
• When going on rides one staff member must always wait at the entrance and
the other should go on the ride with the kids. If the kids have to go in pairs the
staff member on the attraction should be the last one to go on the ride so that
they are sure that all the kids have been and that they will be met by the other
staff member waiting at the entrance.
This might all seem like common sense (and believe me it is!) but unfortunately we
have had episodes in the past of staff members forgetting their responsibilities, going
on rides together whilst supposedly supervising kids and then suddenly realizing they
have no idea where their kids are. Don’t let it happen to you!
Camp Manual140
English Summer Camp
Mid-week Excursions
Magic Village Adventure Center
The first Wednesday of camp there is a mini excursion to the Adventure activities
center. Monitors and Teachers will go here the whole day. Half the kids are taught in
morning, other half doing sports. Then the other way round for afternoon. Half staff off
in morning, other half in afternoon.
Intercamp Competition
The Intercamp Competition is a favorite of staff and campers alike. The Intercamp
Competition is when campers get their chance to represent their camps in sporting and
non sporting events. It’s a day of fun, shouting en masse (all in good fun!), enthusiasm,
participation, painted faces and competitiveness!
Intercamp is held in Family Camp on different days for Junior/Pioneer and Senior
campers. Some camps must travel up to a couple of hours in order to get to the site,
so some changes may be made in order to be on time for the competition. Activity
Coordinators should be communicating prior to the event to make sure arrivals are on
time as well as any other issues that may come up.
Staff is encouraged to paint their faces (and of the campers), wear their camp’s color,
support good sportsmanship and have fun!
Camp Colors
Family Camp
orange
Sport Camp
red
Little Village
brown (NO Intercamp)
Star Camp
yellow
Magic Village
purple
Go Camp
green
Camp Manual141
English Summer Camp
Chapter 15: Departures
Departures signal the end of camp, make for many teary goodbyes and also signal the
start of preparations for the next batch of campers to arrive. As there is a lot to
organise departures have two parts:
•
•
•
The pre-departures on the Friday which includes special events different to
the normal timetable and also supervised packing of bags.
The actual departure day.
Departures for sophomores start on Thursday. The sophomores start to
pack on Thursday while they are waiting for Casino night. After dinner they
should go directly to their rooms and start packing. This is extra time for the
sophomores so that the welfares can look for any lost property. As may
welfares as possible should help out and the Ast. Director should play an
active role.
Friday Pre-Departure Duties
Below you will find explained the differences that happen on a Pre-Departure Friday.
The specific timetables for pre-departure duties can be found in the Arrivals and
Departure Manual. Everyone should carry a copy of the timetable on them as the
timetable varies greatly for each age group. Below are some notes specific to the day.
Breaks
Teachers and monitors do not have their half hour breaks on these days
Staff-camper Basketball Match
Senior campers only. Staff leaders of basketball projects play with campers. Senior
coordinator must have both teams’ lists of players before the start of the event. The
match is watched by the Juniors and Seniors in Family Camp and by the Freshmen
and Seniors in Santi Petri
Packing Bags
Both leaders, Monitor and Teacher, supervise and help campers with packing. Things
to make sure campers do:
•
Fold all clothes before putting into bag. Campers should go back with
their bag as organised as it was when they came to camp.
•
Leave out clothes they will need for that day and for the Saturday.
•
Do not have clothes or possessions of other campers.
•
Have checked the lost property box before packing (in reception).
•
Leave their tent or room very tidy.
•
With the Sophomores, that the clothes list is checked and all clothes are
accounted for.
•
Staff should check bathrooms and laundry bags to make sure campers
are leaving nothing behind.
Special for Sophomores
Sophomore monitors and teachers during unpacking will have a list of clothes that the
campers have brought from home that is completed by the parents of the actual clothes
that they have in their bags. Monitors must take this form and as unpacking the
clothes, if possible, double check the list and then stick the list up on the walls of the
bedrooms (if in residence) and on the wardrobes (if in the campsite). This list should
Camp Manual142
English Summer Camp
stay there for the whole period of the camp, so that the day of packing (Friday) the
monitors and teachers can take down the list and refer to this as packing the campers
bags
For Sophomores and Juniors, to help the monitors and campers on a day to day basis,
between leader partners (teachers and monitors) for the preparation of the campers
arrival, place in the rooms/cabins or in the tents pictures of different clothing/ necessary
things and the name, so that if the campers do not know what trainers are, the monitor
can point to the picture and say the word, so little by little the campers learn the words,
this is a great help and reinforcement of the language, especially for the monitors on
the first Monday when the campers have to have their bags ready for the day.
Recommended vocabulary would be: Trainers, swimsuit, cap, water bottle, sun cream,
shorts, bag, socks, t-shirt, sweater…..
Lost Property
As I’m sure you can appreciate, the campers are excited about seeing their
parents the next day and they will be a little hysterical telling you that they’ve
lost their favourite t-shirts etc. All lost property found over their stay will be
placed in reception for all campers to checkout before they start packing. As a
responsible staff member you should ensure that your group goes through it
thoroughly.
Preparation for Victory Meal
During the Sports sessions some staff will be assigned to helping set up tables etc for
the evening Colour War Victory meals and also preparing the site for Departures.
Trip to Super Sol (only FC)
Special supervision should be given to the seniors to ensure no alcohol or cigarettes
are purchased. When the campers arrive back on camp they must mark their bags
and leave them in an area as designated by the Activity Co-ordinator. No food or drink
should be taken back to the tents or rooms.
Staff-camper Football Match (if time permits) Senior campers only. All multi-activity
campers must watch the game. Senior coordinator should make up staff list of players
(no more than 7) to be discussed with Camp Director at Thursday morning meeting to
make sure all staff members from the other Age Groups are covered for.
Sophomore Staff (in FC)
Monitors and teachers, are required to supervise their assigned sleeping areas until
02.00. This will include making sure no Seniors or Juniors without a monitor enter
these areas.
Senior Sleep Out (where applicable
All campers must sleep in the zone. We have special mattresses for this night
therefore no normal mattresses or sheets should be brought to the zone. Students
should bring their own sleeping bags. Staff with extended Night Watch duties will be
assigned to supervise the campers 02.00-07.00. Staff on this Night Watch duty will be
given the Friday afternoon Sports Sessions off.
Camp Manual143
English Summer Camp
Notes on Saturday Departures Timetable
Rough Departures Timetable (varies per camp):
09.00: Wake up call
09.45: Breakfast for all ages
10.15: Kids to allocated classrooms with assigned Monitors
Teachers report to Director in the gym / theatre for last minute tasks
10.45: Everyone to assigned stations
11.00: Departures start
c. 12.30 Departures finish and departure duties start
Morning Duties:
• There is a general wake up call for everyone.
• The monitors and the teachers are both responsible for the leader group.
• The staff must make sure the tents/rooms are left TIDY.
• On the way to breakfast campers will drop their bags off in a designated area.
After Breakfast:
• The monitors will be assigned to various duties including class supervision, tidy
up duties, welcoming parents etc.
• The teachers will go to the gym (El P) / theatre (SP) where they will wait to meet
the families of the departing children.
• The Arts and Crafts specialist will organise the display of each groups A&C
work to be collected by the kids as they leave camp.
Post Departure:
• Some staff members will be assigned to do Departure DUTIES which they will
do until everything is finished. They will have extended time off the next day.
Star Camp Departures
The departure from Star Camp is more or less the same as Magic Village and Family
Camp. However, the students must check out of their rooms after they have been
inspected by a staff member. The campers will be held responsible for any damaged
hotel property (this also goes for Star Camp staff members).
Little Village Departures
The departure from Little Village is different than the other three camps. The students
put on a welcome show for the parents in the morning (11.00). The students will
present the educational projects that they have created throughout their stay at the
camp. The campers spend about two hours every day on these projects (see
Educational Projects). This is a great way to showcase the hard work that the campers
have put in and allows parents to enjoy them as well. It is a smaller camp which is one
of the reasons it allows for such a function to take place on a busy departures day.
The hard work of the staff also contributes to the showcase. The parents and campers
will then leave after the show (approx. 12.30).
Camp Manual144
English Summer Camp
Chapter 16: Welfare, Health and Medical Procedure
This basic document can give you an idea of some of the situations that can occur on a
Summer Camp in Spain. Obviously there are plenty of other illnesses and incidents
that can occur. If you’re unsure at any time consult the Camp Nurse, Nurse
Monitor or Welfare Monitor.
Welfare: What does it mean?
It means the well being of a person, either camper or staff. We are all responsible for
the well being of each other. It is easier to be aware of a friends well being and how
they are feeling on camp but we are especially responsible for the well being of the
campers.
YOU are the first person to be dealing with Welfare issues, The Welfare Coordinators
are there to support the monitors and teachers who work closely with the campers and
give staff advice and support at all times. They should be informed of incidents and
issues happening in Camp but are not there to deal with every small issue that comes
up, i.e.- making sure the children are wearing clean clothes.
The most common Welfare issues at Camp arise when the Camper is feeling
homesick, not integrating with the group, has problems in class or problems with other
campers or may be experiencing problems and changes at home too. In all these
situations we are here to help them.
A camper can find it difficult to understand or communicate in English and can get a bit
frustrated for not being understood but the language they really need at that time is
affection and understanding. In most of the occasions there is no need to speak their
language but just try to understand what is upsetting the camper, deal with the matter if
possible at the time or if not definitely later and give the camper the support they need,
sometimes they may need a little chat in between them or a one-to-one chat or even
diverting the attention to a different matter, all situations are different, there is not really
right or wrong in some situations but acting using intuition and common sense.
TECS uses different measures to monitor and praise good Welfare practice
amongst our campers, as “TECS Happy Passport” for the Sophomores,
“Thumbs Up Booklet” for Go Camp, “i-book” for Juniors, “Young Achievers” in
Little Village, “ Star Award” for natural English ...
An example of how a Happy Passport is used is given below:
Happy Passport
The “TECS Happy Passport” is the Sophomore version of the “TECS Royal Award”.
The “TECS Happy Passport” is orientated towards acting as a way of motivating and
guiding factor for our youngest campers to be positive and happy individuals on camp
and acts as a perfect bargaining tool to deal with Welfare issues which was it’s original
principal purpose.
Campers earn smiley faces for doing certain things in and out of the classroom. The
booklet must be carried in the camper’s bag at all times and students must be told to
take extra care not to lose it. The final “TECS Happy Passport” will be handed out by
Camp Manual145
English Summer Camp
the class teacher during departures to the parents. The top three children who get the
most points in an age group will be given a certificate and a prize at the awards
ceremony. Please note that the happy passport is more a tool to evaluate a student’s
effort, participation and attitude than an evaluation of their actual skills or ability at
things - which is more the purpose of the camp report.
Health and Medical Procedures
Basic Procedure
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Make sure you are aware of your leader group’s health issues, diet
requirements or medical conditions, as it is also your responsibility.
The first contact to deal with a camper’s health and medical condition is YOU
and the most important factor to take into account is Reassurance. Campers
need to feel safe at all times but especially in these situations when they feel
weaker, being confident everything is going to be ok, the matter is being dealt
and everything is under control is essential for our Campers.
Homesickness and attention seeking, as they are so far from home, is in many
occasions the reason why a camper wants to see the Nurse, you need to filter
this information and distinguish between a Welfare issue and a Medical
condition. If it is a Welfare issue, you should start dealing with it immediately
and when appropriate inform the relevant people, i.e.-Welfare Coordinator. If it
is a Medical Condition, you could start with the Basic First Aiding before sent to
the nurse or before he/she arrives.
If a camper has a minor ailment, send them to the nurse at a time when the
nurse is working and in the infirmary (check the times on the Infirmary). NOTE
as the leader responsible, it is your responsibility to make sure that that child
rejoins your group and to find out what the nurse decided in terms of treatment.
If with a minor ailment, you feel comfortable giving basic medical treatment and
your leader responsibilities will not be neglected you can attempt to treat the
camper with Basic First Aiding.
If with a minor ailment, the nurse is not there and you feel comfortable giving
basic medical treatment, and will not be neglecting your leader responsibilities
you can attempt to treat the camper.
If it is a serious incident, send a responsible child to get the nurse, or if he/she
is off site, the Welfare Coordinator, Ast. Welfare Coordinator Assistant Director
or Camp Director. NOTE you should never leave your leader group unless
there is another staff member to cover for you.
In the case of a serious incident, unless the staff member believes the incident
to be life threatening they should not phone for an ambulance. The decision of
whether an ambulance should be phoned, in all non life threatening situations,
will be taken only by the on duty Assistant Director or Camp Director. In most
situations where a person needs to go to the hospital, to avoid taking an
ambulance off the streets, the on duty Camp Driver and a Welfare Monitor or
Nurse will escort the camper or staff member to the hospital.
In some camps, as it is the case in Family Camp, we have a Doctor who will
come to camp each morning Monday- Friday to check all necessary medical
Camp Manual146
English Summer Camp
•
attention is being given. Staff can make arrangements to see the Doctor at this
time if necessary.24
It is important that children receive all the medical attention they need, but
please also remember that some children use “I need to go to the nurse” as an
excuse to skip out of an activity they do not like so you will always need to
question children, and find out if they really do need to go to the nurse.
Note for Staff: Staff have the opportunity to see the doctor if needed (time must be
arranged with Coordinators). The Welfare Coordinator or Ast. Welfare Coordinator can
help with communication in Spanish if needed.
Who can I go to for help?
Family Camp:
Nurse Monitor, Nurse, Doctor (at certain hours), Coordinators (TEFL, ACT, WELFARE,
Ast. WELFARE), Directors
Sport Camp:
Nurse Monitor, Coordinators (TEFL and ACT), Directors
Star Camp:
Nurse Monitor, Activity Coordinator, Director
Little Village:
Nurse Monitor, Coordinators (TEFL and ACT), Director
Magic Village:
Nurse Monitor, Nurse, Coordinators (TEFL, ACT, Ast. WELFARE), Director
Go Camp:
Nurse, ACT Coordinator, Director
Basic Principles of First Aid
First aid is the first assistance or treatment given to a casualty for any injury or sudden
illness before the arrival of an ambulance or qualified medical expert. It may involve
improvising with facilities and materials available at the time.
Aims of First Aid
First Aid is given to a casualty:
• To preserve life
• To prevent a conditioning worsening
• To promote recovery
Emergency Aid Protocol
24
Please note in common with all work places staff will be responsible for all prescription
charges.
Camp Manual147
English Summer Camp
When dealing with a casualty, or suspect casualty, then the following protocol must be
observed:
D
R
A
B
C
D
E
Danger
Response
Airway
Breathing
Circulation
Deformity
Evacuation
Danger
• Assess the situation
• What has happened?
• Is it safe for me?
• What or who looks more important?
• Anyone about who could assist?
• Make safe
• Remove all dangers, e.g., switch off power
Response
Shout and shake
Open Airway
Tilt head back, using two fingers on chin and holding the forehead.
Check Breathing
• Look at chest
• Listen for breathing
• Feel breath by back of hand over the mouth
Check circulation Feel for pulse. Carotid (neck) Radial (wrist)
Deformity
• Body check, head to toe, check for breaks,
• Bleeding......
Evacuate
Place casualty in the Recovery Position and Arrange Evacuation
Get help
Get help from a qualified first aide staff member and dial 061 for an ambulance
Illnesses and Emergencies
The list below has common incidents that can occur on any summer camp.
Fainting
Fainting is caused by a temporary reduction of blood flow to the brain, e.g. lack of food
or after long periods of physical activity.
Camp Manual148
English Summer Camp
Signs and symptoms
• Brief loss of consciousness, casualty will usually fall to the floor
• Slow pulse
• Pallor, all the blood drains from the face
Treatment
• Lay casualty down and raise and support the legs
• Casualty should recover very quickly
If they don’t recover then it was not a faint, they are unconscious therefore seek
medical help.
Asthma
Asthma is quite common in children and mostly is controlled, but it also can be
dangerous.
Causes:
Allergy
Nervous tension
No obvious reason
Signs and symptoms
• Wheezing
• Distress and anxiety
• Exhaustion due to effort of breathing
• Unconscious
=
These can occur with
• Stops breathing
=
a severe attack
Treatment
• Ask if the casualty is asthmatic
• Reassure casualty
• Sit casualty down leaning forward
• Ensure good supply of air
• Let casualty use medication (blue inhaler)
Burns and Scalds
Main Types according to a camp situation:
• Dry burns – flames, cigarettes, rope burns
• Scalds – steam, hot water
• Radiation burn – sun burns
General Treatment
• Dress area with sterile non-fluffy dressing.
• If burn gets worse consult a medical expert.
Heat Exhaustion
Gradual development, caused by loss of salt and water from the body through
excessive sweating.
Camp Manual149
English Summer Camp
Signs and symptoms
• Headache, dizziness and confusion
• Loss of appetite
• Sweating with pale, clammy skin
Treatment
• Move casualty to cool surroundings
• Raise and support the legs
• Give sips of water
Best cure is prevention
• Drink plenty of water
• Wear caps
• No over-exposure of skin
• Wear sunscreen
Camp Manual150
English Summer Camp
Health and Hygiene
Health and hygiene are very important factors within a Summer Camp. All campers
are away from home for between two and four weeks and clearly they need to be
looked after.
Health and hygiene are particularly important in the Sophomore and Pioneer age
groups. Most children at this age still have their mothers and fathers looking after
them, and in some cases doing everything for them .i.e. washing, cleaning teeth. So
this is where we as monitors and teachers are required to keep an eye on these
campers and as necessary, be there to help them out directly with certain tasks.
Below is a short list of health and hygiene matters which all members of staff
should make sure the campers are doing:
• They are going to the toilet every day.
• They are showering everyday; washing their bodies and hair properly.
• They are wearing flip flops to and IN the showers- no one likes fungus!
• Brushing teeth twice a day; once in the morning and once at night.
• Brushing their hair at least daily.
• Clothes are being washed and are being put into the laundry bins. We don’t
want the campers wearing the same t-shirt for two weeks!
• That the whole group is eating well, variety and appropriate quantity for age and
gender.
• All dietary requirements are met while meal times.
• They are drinking plenty of fluids.
• They are using sunscreen when needed.
• They are not keeping food and drink in their rooms/tents.
• Hanging up wet towels and clothes to dry.
o Ensure they are not drying wet clothes in their rooms/tents! Mildew!
• They are washing their hands before food and after the toilet.
• No medication is kept in their rooms/tents.
• Appropriate clothing and footwear worn at all times.(i.e. not wearing flip flops
when excursions or Sports sessions)
Daily checks of the above are essential with the Sophomores/Pioneers and also
important to be done regularly with the Juniors, particularly the 10-11 year olds of this
age group.
Ensure campers tidy up their rooms at night. During this time, staff must carefully look
to make sure all dirty clothes are put in the clothes bin, wet clothes are hung up, etc.
(see above). Campers tend to be slow in the morning so take advantage of this time to
tidy up.
Older Campers
Obviously these checks are not as crucial to the older campers, although you as their
monitor/teacher will need to be aware of what they are doing and how they are. i.e.
Have they eaten dinner? Do they have their own shower gel? Have they got their tooth
brush? Maybe they forgot it and are embarrassed to mention it to you!
Camp Manual151
English Summer Camp
Junior or Senior female campers may get their period unexpectedly on camp and do
not have the supplies they need. The nurse will have an emergency supply of
compresses and tampons and Camp Support can always purchase what the camper
needs using their pocket money. Be sensitive to these situations as the campers may
be embarrassed.
Camp Manual152
English Summer Camp
What should I do if these problems arise?
•
•
•
First try to deal with them yourself as you are the closest person to the camper.
For example, the camper can not wash out all the suds in their hair. Help that
particular camper rinse their hair yourself. If a camper smells they are probably
not showering properly. Therefore you must monitor the camper at shower
time, discretely and respecting their privacy and make sure they have
soap/shampoo and that they are using it properly. This is why we have shower
supervision.
The next step would be for you to consult the Welfare Coordinator who would
then inform the Nurse and Coordinator, and they would help with the situation.
If the situation persists, the following stage might be that the Welfare
Coordinator calls the camper’s parents for advice and help.
Packing and Hygiene
Packing up at the end of camp directly reflects on the leader partners and their care
and attention of the campers. If monitors and teachers have been on top of laundry
and keeping an eye on each campers possessions, packing time will run much more
smoothly and parents will know that their children have been looked after properly.
Camp Manual153
English Summer Camp
Appendices
Appendix 1 - The Exciting World of Camp – A Campers Perspective
What is Camp? Why do Kids come here? What awaits them?
During the training week we will attempt to familiarise you as much as possible with what to
expect when the campers arrive. The reality is though, we are sure that for most, no matter
how hard we try it will still be quite a shock when the first campers arrive.
In order to help you imagine camp life what follows is a typical day on camp from a Camper’s
perspective. Please note that the order of activities will be subject to the specific camp´s
timetable.
Camp Life: What to expect
Entering camp can be a bewildering experience for the campers. Many have never been
away from home before and suddenly they are thrust into this alien environment where
everyone is speaking a language they hardly understand.
A Day on Camp: A Camper’s Experience
Wake Up Call
Everyday on camp begins with the famous ¨It’s time to get up, wakey, wakey, wakey” and is
followed by the friendly, but perhaps considering the time in the morning, not always
welcome, arrival of your leader to your tent/room, to give you that little extra incentive to get
out of bed and get the day going.
Room Inspection
The first task of the day is cleaning your tent/room. Your monitors will be sure to make you
clean This is no bad thing though as inspections are done daily and points awarded. There
are individual daily winners and also the lure of a prize at the end of camp Awards
Ceremony. Also the members of the winning Room/Tent each day have the privilege of being
able to individually nominate a member of staff to enter the gunk list for Casino Night. A fun
night when you will play games and vote for a the staff member you want to see covered in
lots of horrible gunk.
Also if you don´t clean your room you could end up missing your chill out time and doing a
dreaded litter pick, a fate that awaits any room or tent receiving less than 13 points (out of
20) on any given day. The next thing you need to do is prepare your bags for the day. This
means checking the timetables and making sure you have everything you need for that day,
because you will not be able to return to your room / tent until the evening.
Breakfast
After this it’s off to breakfast with your group leader. You will sit at the same table as you sat
the night before and this will be your table for meal at camp (unless you are a Senior when
you can choose where you want to sit).
Camp Manual154
English Summer Camp
English Class
When breakfast is finished, it is off to form up in your class groups. Your monitor will take
you to the meeting area, then with your monitor’s help, you will check the lists and find your
class group and your teacher.
Then it is off to English class which will last from 3-4 hours split in two by a break. The first
half will be focused on improving your level and the second on teaching you useful language
that you may need on camp for general day to day purposes or specifically for evening
entertainments and sports.
Lunch then Chill Out
After lunch you will be taken to your age groups chill out area and have time to relax. This is
also the time of the day when you can will be given your mobile and have a chance to phone
home if you want.
Arts and Crafts / Creative Projects
Arts and Crafts sessions will be led by one teacher and one monitor who will probably be
different people to your English teacher and Leader Group monitor and each group will have
a name for example Wizards, Trolls and Jedi Knights and a designated meeting point which
will be the same every day.
Arts and Crafts Classes will be of one of two forms. (1) individual scheduled arts crafts
activity, for example: clay modelling, poster painting, friendship bracelets, mask making or (2)
preparation for evening entertainments, which could involve anything, from time to prepare
your performance for Carnival Night to making things for Capture the Flag.
Creative project sessions are the equivalent of Arts and Crafts for the Seniors but are more
like “adult activities”. You will have a chance to choose your project which might by the
Camp Magazine, Crew Member Training, Dance Training.
Sports
When the arts crafts sessions have finished it is off to form up in your multi-activity, or non
multi-activity groups if you have chosen to do Watersports, Golf, Tennis, or Horse Riding.
Each multi-activity will take one of two forms (on most days if you are a Senior, you will have
the freedom to select from a range of activities). Each day you will have the chance to do a
number of different sports and some days you will also have the chance to take part in
competitions such as Iron Man or Colour War contests.
Shower Time / Dinner and Leader Bonding
After sports its time to have showers before you go off to dinner. During this time if you are
in the Sophomores or Juniors you will also take part in Leader Bonding sessions where you
will play games with your leaders.
Evening Entertainments
To finish the day off, it is evening entertainment time. The evening ents are the highlight of
camp and lots of fun is sure to be had.
Bed Time
Finally after a long exhausting day it is off to bed. Camp days are long but action packed.
You will experience it all and carry the memories of camp long into the future. TECS IS
WAITING TO WELCOME YOU.
Camp Manual155
English Summer Camp
Appendix 2 – Change over times between Activities
One of the most hectic organizational times of the day for the management, staff and
campers alike is the change over between activities. Good “change overs” are essential for
several reasons:
•
•
•
•
They enable us to keep to the timetable,
They prevent campers getting lost, be it intentionally (the smokers) or unintentionally
(our younger campers).
Many exist to help prevent theft and vandalism.
They prevent the staff member losing control of their assigned group.
and most importantly . . .
•
Smooth running “change overs” reduce the stress level we all feel.
The main “change overs” of activities are as follows:
Sleeping Areas to Breakfast:
• All campers, including seniors, must go to breakfast with their assigned
monitor/teacher. Campers who are ready must wait and everyone must go as a
group. Star Campers go to breakfast on their own.
• All rooms must be locked, tents zipped up and the camp site gate locked (regardless
of whether there is still another group to leave – this acts as a good reminder to them
to lock the gate).
• Campers should take all the things they need for that day with them. They do not
return to their sleeping areas until evening showers.
• Breakfast should not start until the coordinator gives the go ahead.
Breakfast to Meeting Point:
• Campers should only leave the table to take medicines or go to the toilet. Children
must remain seated at the end of the meal. With Juniors and Sophomores, only one
camper from a table should go to the toilet at any one time. The Senior Coordinator
should do checks of the bathrooms to prevent smoking taking place.
• No group leaves the dinning table until the Coordinator informs the staff member that
they can take their group off.
• The tables must be left tidy with all things stacked in the middle of the table.
• Groups leave one at a time with their staff member and walk as a group to the
meeting area.
• Staff member must walk with group to the meeting point and only leave when all
children have found their relevant teacher.
Class meeting point to Class:
• Always wait for your students at the assigned meeting point.
• Wait for all your students to arrive. If more than five minutes past class time and
some students have not arrived, go to class and on the way let the Camp Director
know the name of the students missing.
• First days of camp wait a little longer.
Camp Manual156
English Summer Camp
Class to Break Areas:
• Teachers must start and end their break times on time.
• Campers should walk with teacher to break area.
• Campers stay in the area with the Teachers. This is not a break for Teachers.
• Break times last only 15 minutes and campers should return together with teacher to
their classroom.
Class to Lunch:
• Teachers should leave their class tidy with all kids folders pilled up and stored in a
safe area. Classes must be locked and air conditioning turned off, as must the pool
and the computer room.
• Campers walk with teacher to dinning tables. Although seniors have a free seating
arrangement only one teacher/monitor should sit on any table, as they are still
responsible for controlling the kids.
• All Junior and Sophomore monitors/teachers must sit on the assigned leader
group table with their leader group, not class group. If there is not enough
space, add another table.
• Lunch should not start until the coordinator gives the go ahead.
• Again no campers should leave the tables except to take medicines and go to the
toilet. With young campers, only one camper from a table should go to the toilet at
any one time. The Senior Coordinator should do checks of the bathrooms to prevent
smoking taking place.
• Like with breakfast, no group leaves their table until the Coordinator informs the staff
member that they can take their group off.
• The tables must be left tidy with all things stacked in the middle of the table.
“Chill Out” to A+C or Projects
Family Camp
• For Sophomores, monitors form up the A+C groups in the sandpit next to each
groups sign. Groups walk one at time to classrooms.
• For Juniors, the monitors form up the A&C group in the gym (in their areas as
indicated by signs on the walls) and then walk their group to their assigned group’s
classroom. Groups should walk one at a time to their classroom.
• For Seniors, projects groups are formed in the zone and then groups leave with the
assigned staff to the project area.
Arts and Crafts and Projects to Sports Activities
• Check with coordinator per camp. Campers will need to be lead by the specialist
monitor to the meeting area to go to extra activities. Multi activity monitors will collect
their sports group in the assigned area. All monitors MUST check their lists to ensure
they have the correct campers in their group. Inform the Activity Coordinator if you
are missing any children.
Sports or Chill Out to Showers
• Only at the timetabled end of sports sessions are campers told to go to their sleeping
areas, very important this is not before, as there will not be another staff
member there to supervise them.
• Sophomore monitors must supervise showering in their sleeping areas. Junior
monitors must walk to their sleeping area and ensure the teachers are there
supervising before they start their break. Seniors form up groups for “chill out time”
(Your Coordinator will assign you your area)
Camp Manual157
English Summer Camp
•
Monitors will need to unlock the campsite gate and the individual bedrooms.
NON MULTI-ACTIVITY to Sports Activities or Showers
• The non multi-activity responsibles must ensure that any child who comes back from
a non multi-activity before showers, joins a sports group. The sailing and horse riding
responsible must come back on the first bus load and must accompany all the
campers of all age groups to reform with a sports group of their age.
Showers to Dinner
• Like in the morning, campers must go accompanied with their monitor/teacher to the
dinning area. This includes the Seniors (except in Star Camp)
• Again all rooms must be locked, tents zipped up and camp site gate locked
(regardless if there is still another group to leave – this acts as a good reminder to
them to lock the gate).
• Dinner should not start until the Coordinator gives the go ahead.
• Again no campers should leave the tables except to take medicines. With Juniors and
Sophomores, only one camper from a table should go to the toilet at any one time.
The senior coordinator should do checks of the bathrooms to prevent smoking taking
place.
• The tables must be left tidy with all things stacked in the middle of the table.
Evening Activity to Bed
• Kids should reform into leader groups and walk to the sleeping areas with the
assigned staff member.
• Groups should leave staggered to reduce noise level.
• The Juniors and Seniors must be reminded to be quiet so as not to wake the
Sophomores (and Juniors in case of Seniors).
**** If at any change over time you find yourself with missing campers inform your age group
coordinator. Please remember you will only know which campers are supposed to be in your
group if carry all lists with you at all times.
Camp Manual158
English Summer Camp
Appendix 3 - Campers Rules in Spanish
Below are a list of rules in Spanish you should make sure your campers are aware of
and are always obeying. On the arrivals Sunday you should introduce all rules which
are relevant to the age of your leader group (i.e no smoking or alcohol is not relevant to
Sophomores).
1. Respeta a los demás y se educado.
2. Respeta las cosas de los demás, nunca tomes nada prestado sin pedir
permiso.
3. Respeta a tu monitor / profesor, escucha lo que te dice y se obediente.
4. Quédate en tu grupo y si necesitas separarte pregúntale a tu monitor o profesor
primero.
5. Anda, no corras por los pasillos.
6. No entrar en la piscina sin tu monitor o profesor.
7. No está permitido tener comida en las habitaciones o tiendas.
8. No decir palabrotas.
9. No fumar ni beber alcohol.
10. No tirar basura al suelo.
11. No está permitido tener teléfonos móviles.
12. A la hora de acostarse no está permitido salir de la tienda o habitación
asignada.
13. No está permitido a ninguna hora estar en la zona de alojamiento del sexo
opuesto.
14. No está permitido estar en las zonas de alojamiento fuera de horario de
duchas o de dormir.
15. No está permitido entrar en las zonas del personal.
16. Hay que hablar siempre en ingles con el personal, excepto en caso de urgencia
con el responsable de bienestar
17. No dejes ropa mojada dentro de la habitación o tienda, no pongas ropa a lavar
mojada, secala antes… no queremos habitaciones apestosas.
18. Si tienes alguna queja dirígete a tu responsable de bienestar y comenta con el
lo que te ocurre.
Camp Manual
159
English Summer Camp
Appendix 4 - Camp Map: Family Camp
SAND PIT
CAMP
SITE
RESIDENCE
PARK
CANTEEN
FRONT
LAWN
TENNIS
ADMIN
P1
P2
ZONE
Camp Manual
160
English Summer Camp
Appendix 5 - Guide for Camp Tour El Puerto
What follows gives you an idea of what you should cover when taking your leader
group on their tour on the first day.
Remember that you must speak slowly and clearly, and don´t start explaining
something until you have all their attention!
The Tour can start at any point on the route and the actual starting point should be
agreed with your Coordinator. The following should be pointed out during the tour.
ADMIN. BLOCK
# FRONT LAWN - Meeting place for Sailors
# OFFICE –
TECS General Manager
Director of Language Camps
Camp Director
Assistant Director
Welfare + Parental Comm
TECS Secretaries
– David Randell
– Douglas Haines
– Liz Grabo
– Guillermo Moreno
– Jesús Dávila
Children should be told that the admin block is out of bounds and they should have no
reason to enter their.
OUTSIDE
# THE ZONE – Chill out area for Seniors (Only Senior Age Group can enter)
- Senior meeting point area.
# POOL
• Used during sports sessions: show and read the rules of the pool. i.e. no
running, no shoes, no sun-cream etc
• Showers and toilets for the pool area, these will also be used before lunch and
dinner for washing hands.
# COORDINATORS’ OFFICE
• Where the Activity Coordonitors work from.
• If you need to find your Coordinator very often you will find them here.
# DINING AREA (Inside Juniors, outside Seniors)
• Tables; see names and seating plan table number i.e. 1,2.
• Inform re. table rules and respect
• Times of eating breakfast, lunch and dinner. Point out menu
• Show timetables, record sheets.
• Show inside for toilets and kitchen
# STAFF ROOM – No entrance, only staff allowed
# COURT – Usage of courts.
Camp Manual
161
English Summer Camp
•
•
Sports time for basketball, tennis, rounders and at night for evening
entertainment.
“Pick up area” when taking buses for beach BBQ and excursions and non-multiactivity (Sailing, Tennis and Horse Riding)
~ from this point the group walk back past the dining area, past the pool and
behind the admin building to then walk up the ramp to the…
BLUE BUILDING
# RECEPTION AREA
This is where children go when they receive calls.
In coming calls are only received here during the following times:
Sophomores:
Juniors:
Seniors
In: 14.45-15.10
In: 15.10 – 15.35
No phone calls in.
NOTE See section on phone calls for more information regarding phone calls.
•
•
•
•
•
Timetables of multi-activity, art and craft, riders/sailors/tennis and Even Ents.
Record sheets for the Colour War competition.
Colour War Cup.
Mail Box, where they pick up and send letters also sometimes email messages
for the campers are left here. They should check the box daily.
Go through Campers’ rules and what happens if not obeyed.
# BOYS RESIDENCE
• Show rooms, look for names in your group (if any)
• Show toilets
• Inspection sheets, explanation of the inspection every morning, that the
points are totaled up and there is a prize for the winning room after each week.
• Morning routine of packing bag for the day. Need to take everything they will
need with them for that day.
• Tell female campers this is a no go area.
• Outline that residence is a no go area between going to breakfast and evening
showers. They should not use the toilets here between these times.
# SANDPIT – SOPHOMORE AREA.
What happens there?
• Parties, bonfires, games.
• Play area during chill out period.
• Archery in sports time (explain basic safety features).
• Sophomore meeting points.
• Show campers where their meeting points are (if relevant)
# GIRLS RESIDENCE
• Show rooms, look for names in your group (if any).
Camp Manual
162
English Summer Camp
•
•
•
•
•
Show toilets.
Inspection sheets, explanation of the inspection every morning, that the
points are totaled up and there is a prize for the winning room after each week.
Morning routine of packing bag for the day. Need to take everything they will
need with them for that day.
Tell male campers this is a no go area.
Outline that residence is a no go area between going to breakfast and evening
showers. They should not use the toilets here between this times.
# CLASSROOMS – Classrooms Soph: 09.30-13.00, Jun: 09.30-13.30, Sen: 10.0014.00 with breaks in middle.
• Same room used for art and crafts.
• Computer room, for art and craft sessions, once per week.
• Art room, to use for art and keeping materials and work done.
# TEFL OFFICE
• Where all English material is kept.
• TEFL Coordinators’ office.
# TOILETS – On the second floor, the ones close to the Computer room. Boys and
Girls.
~ from top floor bring the group down stairs to see where the nurse is.
# NURSE – AREA FOR THE NURSE
• If a problem occurs tell your leader/teacher and see the nurse.
• (Refer students to nurse and doctor times, on door of enfermera) What to do if
not there = if important see WELFARE Monitor if not wait until he/she returns.
# SPORTS HALL –
• Used for sports, evening entertainment (show them the stage).
• Show the sports cupboard but this access is only for staff.
• Show Junior campers where their A+C meeting points are.
# SHOWERS –
• Girls and boys use these in residence but toilets are used by anyone in the
sports hall.
• Shower time before breakfast and before dinner.
• Show staff showers and toilets and inform that these are out of bounds.
~ come back out the main doors, to the park
# PARK –
•
•
•
Explain that Capture the Flag takes place here (Sophomores and Juniors).
Explain a little about litter problems, everyone pulling together.
Explain the Colour Flag, with the flag always raised of the colour currently
holding the cup.
# CAMPSITE
Camp Manual
163
English Summer Camp
# TENTS –
• Boys and girls, show what’s inside the tent i.e. cupboards, mats, pillows.
• Who is in what tent (if applicable). Show leaders tents.
• Morning routine of packing bag for the day. Need to take everything they will
need with them for that day.
• Inspection sheets, explanation of the inspection every morning, that the
points are totaled up and there is a prize for the winning room after each week.
• Tell campers tents that are not theirs are no go areas.
• Lockers – per tent, tell them they must put there valuables there. Keys are kept
by the leader.
• Go through Campers’ rules and what happens if not obeyed.
• Timetable- the same as in blue building.
• Campsite Rules – Go through these with your group explaining any problems.
# SHOWERS – Girls and Boys showers and toilets.
Camp Manual
164
English Summer Camp
Appendix 6 –Magic Village Map
Camp Manual
165
English Summer Camp
Appendix 7– Little Village Map
Camp Manual
166
English Summer Camp
Appendix 8– Star Camp Map
Camp Manual
167
English Summer Camp
Appendix 9– Sport Camp Map
Camp Manual
168
English Summer Camp
Appendix 10– Go Camp Map
Camp Manual
169
English Summer Camp
Published by TECS Summer Camps
Apdo. Correos 85, 11500 El Puerto de Santa Maria,
Cadiz, Spain
TECS Summer Camps is a department of TECS –
The Educational Consortium of Spain.
http://www.tecs.es
© TECS Summer Camps 2010
All rights reserved. This book is copyright. No unauthorised reproduction, photocopying
or distribution of any part is allowed without the prior written permission of TECS
Summer Camps. / Todos los derechos reservados. Este manual tiene los derechos
de propiedad. Prohibida su reproducción, fotocopia o distribución total o parcial sin
permiso escrito de TECS Summer Camps.
First published by TECS Summer Camps 2008
Second edition 2009
Third edition 2010
Printed in Spain by TECS
Edition Year
Created by
Updated by
Original Edition
Douglas Haines
2006
Tim Haines
2007
Noreen Walsh
2008
Liz Grabo
2009
Liz Grabo
2010
Liz Grabo
Camp Manual
Contributions by
Maria Canos
170